Intermec Technologies 700C-SMC45-1 Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans User Manual back let85x11

Intermec Technologies Corporation Notepad Computer with 3 Radio Lans back let85x11

UserManual.wiki >

Intermec Technologies >

700C-SMC45-1 User Manual >

User Manual

User’s Manual700 Series ColorMobile Computer

700 Series ColorMobile ComputerUser’s Manual

Contentsiii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualContentsBefore You Begin xv....................................................................Warranty Information xv...................................................Safety Summary xv........................................................Warnings, Cautions, and Notes xvi...........................................About This Manual xvi....................................................Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or Keypad xvii......................Related Publications xviii...................................................Global Services and Support xviii.............................................Web Support xviii........................................................IntroductionAbout the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer 2...............................................Audio System 2...........................................................Speaker 2...................................................Internal Microphone 2........................................External Headset Jack 2........................................Battery 2................................................................Low Battery Shutdown 3.......................................System Status Maintained 4....................................CAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CD 4...................................Modem Support 4.........................................................Network Support 4........................................................Removeable Card Support 5.................................................CompactFlash Cards 5........................................SecureDigital Cards 5.........................................MultiMediaCards 5...........................................Software Build Version 5....................................................What’ s New 6.........................................................................1

Contentsiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket PC 2002Introduction 8.........................................................................Premium versus Professional Editions 8......................................................Where to Find Information 10............................................................Basic Skills 11.........................................................................Buttons and Stylus 11......................................................Today Screen 11..........................................................Programs 13.............................................................Navigation Bar and Command Bar 14.........................................Pop-up Menus 15.........................................................Notifications 15..........................................................Enter Information on Your 700 Series Computer 16...............................Typing With the Soft Keyboard 17...............................Using Block Recognizer 17.....................................Using Letter Recognizer 18.....................................Using Transcriber 18..........................................Selecting Typed Text 18........................................Writing on the Screen 19....................................................Selecting the Writing 19.......................................Converting Writing to Text 20..................................Drawing on the Screen 22...................................................Creating a Drawing 22........................................Selecting a Drawing 22........................................Recording a Message 23....................................................Creating a Recording 23.......................................Using My Text 24.........................................................Finding and Organizing Information 25........................................Customizing Your 700 Series Computer 26......................................Adjusting Settings 26.........................................Adding or Removing Programs 26................................Microsoft ActiveSync 29.................................................................Microsoft Pocket Outlook 31.............................................................Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings 31.............................Creating an Appointment 32....................................Using the Summary Screen 33..................................Creating Meeting Requests 33...................................Scheduling a Meeting 33.......................................Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues 34...................................Creating a Contact 34.........................................Finding a Contact 35.........................................Using the Summary Screen 36..................................Tasks: Keeping a To Do List 37...............................................Creating a Task 38...........................................Using the Summary Screen 39..................................Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas 40.......................................Creating a Note 41...........................................2

Contentsv700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages 42................................Synchronizing E-mail Messages 42...............................Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server 42........................Using the Message List 43......................................Composing Messages 45.......................................Managing E-mail Messages and Folders 46.........................Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail Server 46.......Companion Programs 47................................................................Pocket Word 47...........................................................Creating a Document 47.......................................Typing Mode 49.............................................Writing Mode 50............................................Drawing Mode 51............................................Recording Mode 51...........................................Pocket Excel 52...........................................................Creating a Workbook 52.......................................Tips for Working in Pocket Excel 53..............................MSN Messenger 53........................................................Setting Up 54...............................................Working with Contacts 54.....................................Chatting with Contacts 55.....................................Windows Media Player for Pocket PC 57.......................................Microsoft Reader 58.......................................................Getting Books on Your 700 Series Computer 58.....................Using the Library 59..........................................Reading a Book 60...........................................Using Reader Features 61......................................Removing a Book 61..........................................Pocket Internet Explorer 62...............................................................The Mobile Favorites Folder 62...............................................Favorite Links 62..........................................................Mobile Favorites 62........................................................Using AvantGo Channels 64.................................................Using Pocket Internet Explorer 65.............................................Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 66........................Browsing the Internet 66.......................................Getting Connected 67...................................................................Transferring Items Using Infrared 67...........................................Sending Information 67.......................................Receiving Information 67......................................Connecting to an Internet Service Provider 68...................................Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP 68.......................Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP 69......................Connecting to Work 70.....................................................Creating a Modem Connection to Work 70........................Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work 71.......................Ending a Connection 72....................................................Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server 72.....................................Setting Up an E-mail Service 73..............................................

Contentsvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInstalling ApplicationsPackaging an Application 76..............................................................Installing Applications 76................................................................Using Microsoft ActiveSync 77...............................................Using the FTP Server 78....................................................Using the Application Manager in Unit Manager 78...............................Using a Storage Card 78....................................................Copying to a CompactFlash Card 78.............................Copying to a SecureDigital Storage Card 79........................Updating the System Software 79..........................................................Application Migration 80................................................................Cabinet File Installation 82...............................................................Network SupportCORE 84............................................................................Network Adapters 85...................................................................Ethernet Communications 86................................................802.11b Communications 87................................................Profiles 87..................................................Import/Export 96............................................Scan List 97.................................................Network Selection APIs 98.....................................Function Summary 101.......................................802.11b Radio CORE Module 107..............................WWAN Radio Options 110.................................................GSM/GPRS 110.............................................CDMA/1xRTT SB555 110....................................WAN Radio CORE Module 111................................AT Command Interface 115....................................Wireless Printing 120......................................................Documentation 120..........................................Bluealps CORE Module 120....................................AutoIP/DHCP 122.....................................................................SNMP Configuration 123................................................................The Focus was “Simple” 123.................................................Using SNMP 123.........................................................Retrieval of Management Information 124......................................An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a Time 124...................Conclusion 124...........................................................SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer 125............................Management Information Base 125..............................Object Identifiers 126.........................................Configuring with SNMP 126...................................34

Contentsvii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrinter SupportPrinting ASCII 128.....................................................................Directly to a Port 128......................................................Directly to a Generic Serial Port 128...........................................IrDA Printer Driver 128.................................................................NPCP Printer Driver 129................................................................About NPCP 129.........................................................NPCP Driver Installation and Removal 129.....................................Opening the NPCP Driver 130..............................................Closing the NPCP Driver 130...............................................Reading from the NPCP Driver 130...........................................Writing to the NPCP Driver 130.............................................NPCP Driver I/O Controls 131..............................................NPCP Printer Communications 132...........................................Sample Code 132.........................................................NPCP Error Codes 133....................................................O’ Neil Printer Driver 134...............................................................DTR Driver Installation and Removal 134......................................Opening the DTR Driver 135...............................................Closing the DTR Driver 135................................................Writing to the DTR Driver 135..............................................DTR Printer Communications 135............................................Scanner SupportScanner Control and Data Transfer 138.....................................................Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces 138..............................................Multiple ADC COM Object Support 139......................................How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces 140............................Read-Ahead Bar Code Data Access 140............................Grid Data Filtering 141........................................Filter Expression Values 142....................................Editing Expression Values 144..................................ADC Connection 145.........................................2D Imager Overview 146...................................................Data Collection Features 146...................................Image Acquisition Features 147..................................Create and Delete ADC COM Object Functions 149.............................ITCDeviceOpen 149.........................................ITCDeviceClose 150..........................................56

Contentsviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC Functions 151......................................................IADC::CancelReadRequest 152.................................IADC::Initialize 153..........................................IADC::QueryAttribute 154....................................IADC::QueryData 155........................................IADC::Read 156.............................................IADC::SetAttribute 157.......................................IBarCodeReaderControl Functions 159........................................IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest 160...................IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED 161.........................IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize 162............................IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep 163...........................IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute 164.......................IBarCodeReaderControl::Read 165...............................IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute 167.........................IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 171.......................IS9CConfig Functions 172..................................................IS9CConfig::GetCodabar 173...................................IS9CConfig::SetCodabar 174...................................Codabar Default Settings 175...................................Codabar Enumerations 175....................................IS9CConfig::GetCode39 176...................................IS9CConfig::SetCode39 177....................................Code 39 Default Settings 177...................................Code 39 Enumerations 178....................................IS9CConfig::GetCode93 179...................................IS9CConfig::SetCode93 179....................................Code 93 Default Settings 179...................................Code 93 Enumerations 180....................................IS9CConfig::GetCode128 180..................................IS9CConfig::SetCode128 181...................................Code 128/EAN 128 Default Settings 181..........................Code 128 Enumerations 182...................................IS9CConfig::GetI2of5 183.....................................IS9CConfig::SetI2of5 184......................................Interleaved 2 of 5 Default Settings 184............................Interleaved 2 of 5 Enumerations 185..............................IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 185................................IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 186.................................Matrix 2 of 5 Default Settings 186...............................Matrix 2 of 5 Enumerations 186.................................IS9CConfig::GetMSI 187......................................IS9CConfig::SetMSI 187......................................MSI Default Settings 187......................................MSI Enumerations 188........................................IS9CConfig::GetPDF417 188..................................IS9CConfig::SetPDF417 189...................................PDF 417 Default Settings 190..................................PDF 417 Enumerations 190....................................IS9CConfig::GetPlessey 192....................................IS9CConfig::SetPlessey 192....................................Plessey Default Settings 193....................................Plessey Enumerations 193......................................IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 194...............................IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 195...............................

Contentsix700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStandard 2 of 5 Default Settings 196..............................Standard 2 of 5 Enumerations 196...............................IS9CConfig::GetTelepen 197...................................IS9CConfig::SetTelepen 197....................................Telepen Default Settings 197....................................Telepen Enumerations 198.....................................IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan 198...................................IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan 200...................................UPC/EAN Default Settings 201.................................UPC/EAN Enumerations 201...................................IS9CConfig2 Functions 204.................................................IS9CConfig2::GetCode11 205..................................IS9CConfig2::SetCode11 205...................................Code 11 Default Settings 206...................................Code 11 Enumerations 206....................................IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds 207............................IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds 208.............................Custom Identifier Assignments 209..............................Custom Identifier Default Settings 210............................Custom Identifier Example 210.................................IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble 211..............................IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble 212..............................Postamble and Preamble Defaults 212.............................IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext 213...............................IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext 213...............................PDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default Settings 214.............IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit 214...............................IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit 214................................Symbology ID Transmission Option 215..........................IS9CConfig3 Functions 216.................................................ISCP Commands 216.........................................ISCP::GetConfig 217.........................................ISCP::SetConfig 218..........................................AIM Symbology ID Defaults 219.............................................IImage Interface 221....................................................................IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer 221...............................................IImage::ReadSigCapFile 224.................................................IImage::ReadImage 225....................................................IImage::CancelReadImage 226...............................................IImage::Start 226.........................................................IImage::Stop 227..........................................................IImage::Open 227.........................................................IImage::Close 228.........................................................Data Collection Configuration 229.........................................................

Contentsx 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTethered Scanner 230...................................................................Enabling and Disabling 230.................................................Changing Comm Settings 231...............................................Tethered Scanner 231.........................................Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner 232........................Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings 232............................Error Message 232.........................................................Scanner Cabling 232...................................................Limitations and Capabilities 233..........................................ProgrammingCreating CAB Files 236.................................................................Creating Device-Specific CAB Files 236........................................Creating an .INF File 236......................................Sample .INF File 245.........................................Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL 248.................................After the CAB File Extraction 248............................................Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard 249......................................Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard 250.........................................FTP Server 251........................................................................Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor 252..............................BlockSize 252...............................................DeviceName 253.............................................DeviceURL 253.............................................IDNATarget 254.............................................ManifestName 254...........................................PauseAtStartup 255...........................................Root 255...................................................Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks 256...................................Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application 260...............................Autostart FTP 260........................................................Full Screen 262........................................................................Kernel I/O Controls 264.................................................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO 264.....................................IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM 265.......................................IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM 270...................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID 272.........................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO 273.....................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO 274...........................IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 275............................................IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 275............................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO 276.......................................IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE 277.....................................IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 278...............................................IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION 279..................................IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 280................................................7

Contentsxi700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualReboot Functions 280...................................................................IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT 280...............................................IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT 280............................................IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT 280............................................Remapping the Keypad 281..............................................................Unshifted Plane 281.......................................................Gold Plane 281...........................................................Alpha Plane 281..........................................................Key Values 282...........................................................How Key Values Are Stored in Registry 282.....................................Change Notification 283....................................................Advanced Keypad Remapping 283............................................Scan Codes 283...........................................................Sample View of Registry Keys 284............................................Control Panel AppletsConfiguration Parameters 286.............................................................Changing a Parameter Setting 286............................................About Configuration Parameters 287..........................................Data Collection Control Panel Applet 288...................................................Symbologies 289..........................................................Code 39 290................................................Standard 2 of 5 291...........................................Codabar 292................................................UPC/EAN 293..............................................Code 93 294................................................Code 128 295...............................................Plessey 298.................................................MSI 299...................................................PDF 417 300...............................................Interleaved 2 of 5 303.........................................Matrix 2 of 5 304............................................Telepen 305.................................................Code 11 306................................................QR Code 307...............................................Data Matrix 308.............................................Symbology Options 309....................................................Symbology ID 309...........................................Prefix 315..................................................Suffix 316..................................................Beeper/LED 317..........................................................Beeper Volume 318...........................................Beeper Frequency 320.........................................Good Read Beeps 321.........................................Good Read Beep Duration 322..................................Imager 323..............................................................Aimer LED duration 323......................................Image Dimension 324.........................................A

Contentsxii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVirtual Wedge 325........................................................Virtual Wedge 325...........................................Preamble 326...............................................Postamble 327...............................................Grid 328...................................................Code Page 329..............................................SNMP Control Panel Applet 330..........................................................Security 331.............................................................Read Only Community 331....................................Read/Write Community 332....................................Read Encryption 333.........................................Write Encryption 334.........................................Encryption Key 335..........................................Tr a p s 336...............................................................Authentication 336...........................................Threshold 337...............................................Identification 338.........................................................Contact 338................................................Name 339..................................................Location 340................................................Unit Information Control Panel Applet 341..................................................Versions 342.............................................................Battery Status 343.........................................................CAB Files 344............................................................Unit ManagerData Collection 348....................................................................Symbologies 348..........................................................Symbology ID 349........................................................Beeper/LED 349..........................................................Imager 350..............................................................Virtual Wedge 350........................................................SNMP 350...........................................................................Security 350.............................................................Tr a p s 351...............................................................Identification 351.........................................................Unit 352.............................................................................Date/Time 352...........................................................Backlight Timeout 353.....................................................Key Clicks 354...........................................................Automatic Shutoff 355.....................................................Volume 356..............................................................Using Reader Commands 357.............................................................Change Configuration 357..................................................Set Time and Date 358.....................................................B

Contentsxiii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBar CodesBar Code Symbologies 360...............................................................UPC 362................................................................EAN 362................................................................Codabar 362.............................................................Code 11 363.............................................................Code 39 363.............................................................Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) 363........................................Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) 363...........................................Code 93 364.............................................................Code 128 364............................................................I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) 366...................................................S2of5(Standard2of5) 366................................................Plessey 367..............................................................MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) 367............................................Bar Code Labels 368....................................................................Audio Volume 368........................................................Automatic Shutoff 369.....................................................Backlight Timeout 369.....................................................Key Clicks 370...........................................................Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble 371...................................Grid 371...................................................Preamble 371...............................................Postamble 371...............................................IIndexClasses and Functions 374...............................................................General Index 377......................................................................Files Index 398........................................................................C

Contentsxiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

Before You Beginxv700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBefore You BeginThis section introduces you to standard warranty provisions, safetyprecautions, warnings and cautions, document formatting conventions,and sources of additional product information. A documentation roadmapis also provided to guide you in finding the appropriate information.Warranty InformationTo receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product, con-tact your local Intermec support services organization. In the U.S. call1-800-755-5505, and in Canada call 1-800-668-7043. If you live outsideof the U.S. or Canada, you can find your local Intermec support servicesorganization on the Intermec Web site at www.intermec.com.Note: Opening this product may void the warranty. The internal workingsof this product can only be accessed by Intermec service personnel. Radioreplacements and upgrades require Intermec service personnel.Safety SummaryYour safety is extremely important. Follow these guidelines:SRead and follow all warnings and cautions in this book before handlingand operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, andequipment and data can be damaged if you do no follow the safetywarnings and cautions.SDo not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circum-stances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be presentforyoursafety.SAlways obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury.Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.SBegin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breath-ing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage,you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.SNever work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsibleauthority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shockfrom energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform autho-rized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you complystrictly with approved safety regulations.

Before You Beginxvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWarnings, Cautions, and NotesThe warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual use this format:A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, orstatement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injuryto the persons working on the equipment.Attention Danger: Un avertissement vous avertit d’une procédure defonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit êtrestrictement respecté pour éviter l’occurrence de mort ou de blessuresgraves aux personnes manupulant l’équipement.A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, orstatement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage ordestruction, or corruption or loss of data.Attention: Une précaution vous avertit d’une procédure defonctionnement, d’une méthode, d’un état ou d’un rapport qui doit êtrestrictement respecté pour empêcher l’endommagement ou la destructionde l’équipement, ou l’altération ou la perte de données.Note: Notes are statements that either provide extra information about atopic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition orset of circumstances.About This ManualThe 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’ s Manual provides you withinformation about the features of the 700 Series Color Mobile Computerand how to configure, troubleshoot, and support it. You must be familiarwith your host PC, your network, and your other Intermec equipment.SChapter 1 — IntroductionIntroduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer.SChapter 2 — Pocket PC 2002Introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system from Microsoft Cor-poration, and explains how to use its Outlook, ActiveSync, Internet Ex-plorer, and other companion programs.SChapter 3 — Installing ApplicationsProvides methods to install applications and CAB files, also covers ap-plication migration.SChapter 4 — Network SupportIntroduces the CORE application, network adapters such as Ethernet,802.11b radios, GSM/GPRS or CDMA/1xRTT embedded radio mod-ules, and wireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth module, SNMPconfiguration, and Network Selection APIs.SChapter 5 — Printer SupportProvides information on printing ASCII to either a port or to a genericserial port, and on working with IrDA, NPCP, and O’ Neil printer driv-ers.

Before You Beginxvii700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSChapter 6 — Scanner SupportProvides Automatic Data Collection COM and IImage interfaces andlists settings via Data Collection parameters.SChapter 7 — ProgrammingProgramming information that includes creating CAB files, the FTPServer, Full Screen, Kernel I/O Control Functions, Reboot Functions,and remapping the keypad.SAppendix A — Control Panel AppletsContains detailed information about the Data Collection, SNMP, andUnit Information control panel applets.SAppendix B — Unit ManagerDescribes how to configure some parameters via the Unit Manager ap-plication and includes reader commands.SAppendix C — Bar CodesDescribes some of the more common bar code symbologies and includesbar code labels that can be scanned to configure your 700 Series Com-puter.Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or KeypadThis table describes the formatting conventions for input from PC or hostcomputer keyboards and device keypads.Format ConventionsConvention DescriptionSpecial text Shows the command as you should enter it into the device.Italic text Indicates a variable that you must replace the parameter with a value.Bold text Indicates the keys you must press on a PC or host computer key-board. For example, “press Enter” means you press the key labeled“Enter” on the PC or host computer keyboard.where This word introduces a list of parameters and explains the values youcan specify for them.

Before You Beginxviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRelated PublicationsTo order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local In-termec representative or distributor. Following are related Intermecmanuals, CD-ROMs, and part numbers (P/N). For other versions andlanguages, consult your Intermec sales representative.S700 Series Color Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide(P/N: 962-054-053)S700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Professional Edition WWE(P/N: 235-100-001 Kit)S700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Premium Edition WWE(P/N: 235-101-001 Kit)S700 Series Color Software Tools CD (P/N: 235-099-001)SWindows 95 and Windows CE Configuration Utilities Reference Manual(P/N: 978-054-010)Global Services and SupportSelect any of the following services available from Intermec TechnologiesCorporation:SFactory Repair and On-site RepairTo request a return authorization number for one of our authorized ser-vice centers, or to request an on-site repair technician, call1-800-755-5505, then select option 1.STechnical SupportFor technical support on your Intermec product, call 1-800-755-5505,then select option 2.SService Contract StatusTo inquire about an existing contract, or to renew a contract, call1-800-755-5505, then select option 3.SSchedule Site Surveys or InstallationsTo schedule a site survey, or to request a product or system installation,call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 4.Web SupportVisit our Web site at http://www.intermec.com to download many of ourcurrent manuals in PDF format.Visit our technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) athttp://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to requesttechnical help for all Intermec products.

1700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIntroduction1This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer,developed by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless con-nectivity needs.

IntroductionChapter —12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAbout the 700 Series Color Mobile ComputerAudio SystemSpeakerA speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of thecomputer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CMand a frequency range of 1-8 KHz.Internal MicrophoneThe internal microphone is located on the bottom of the unit to the left ofthe hirose connector.External Headset JackThe external headset jack connects a mono headset to your mobile com-puter for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm, three-conduc-tor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which disables theinternal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack is located onthe bottom of the mobile computer to the right of the hirose connector.BatteryThe 700 Series Computer comes equipped with a nominal 14.4Watt-hour, 7.2V (two 2000 mAh cells), replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon)battery. To view the status of this battery from the 700 Series Computer,tap Start →Settings →the System tab →the Power icon to view thecurrent status of both the main battery and the backup battery. Tap ok toexit this information.

Introduction—Chapter 13700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: The Unit Information control panel applet is only available in the700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region isenabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed.You can also view the battery status for the 700 Series Computer byaccessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Tap the UnitInformation icon, then tap the Battery Status tab to view the currentstatus. Tap ok to exit this information.Low Battery ShutdownIf your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your com-puter will not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Al-though the battery will protect the data against loss for several hours, youshould connect your computer to a power source when you first detect alow battery condition.Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary powerstorage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give youtime to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to putthe computer in a suspend mode before doing so.The battery power fail level is set so that after the system shuts down in alow battery condition, there is still sufficient charge to allow the unit toremain configured, keep proper time, and maintain DRAM (DynamicRandom Access Memory) for at least 72 hours at room temperature if themain battery remains in the mobile computer. The configuration and timeare lost if:SThe battery discharges beyond this level.SThe battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode.SA cold reset is performed on the computer.

$IntroductionChapter —14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSystem Status MaintainedSystem status is maintained in “suspend” when the main battery is re-moved:S10 minutes for 64 MB low-power chipsS5 minutes for 128 MB low-power chipsCAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CDIf you leave the default destination while you install the “\700 ColorMgmt Tools” directory onto your desktop PC, then “C:\Intermec\Inter-mec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files” will be the default directory. Thereare folders within the “\Cab Files” directory that contain demos and pro-gram files. See the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD User’ s Manual formore information about these files.Modem SupportModem PC Cards are not supported by the 700 Series Computer. Howev-er, modem options do include the following:SSwitchable dock that includes a built-in modem and a serial port be-tween which an application can switch.SMini-Landline Modem that can be tethered to the port on the bottomof the 700 Series Computer.SOther external modems that may be connected to the bottom of the700 Series Computer or to the dock.Network SupportRadio CompactFlash Cards cannot be installed by a user. The 700 SeriesComputer must be serviced to install or replace radios. See Chapter 4,“Network Support” for more information.S802.11b radioSIntegrated GSM/GPRS radioSCDPM/1xRTT radioSWireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by SocketCommunications$

IntroductionChapter —16 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualYou can also view the latest software build version on your 700 SeriesComputer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. SelectStart →Settings →the System tab →the Unit Information icon →theVersions tab to view the current build version on your 700 SeriesComputer.What’s NewThe newest functionality is available in software build versions 1.30 orgreater. The following changes have occurred since the last release of thismanual:SApplied new publications standards to this manual.SAdapted instructions using Ethernet connections to fit Intermec require-ments in Chapter 2, “Pocket PC 2002.”SMoved “Updating System Software” and “EFlash” information to the Re-covery CD User’ s Manual from Chapter 3, “Installing Applications.”SRemoved several 802.11 APIs not related to the 700 Series Color Com-puter from Chapter 4, “Network Support.”SAdded the Siemens MC45 radio module to Chapter 4, “Network Sup-port.”SAdded tethered scanner information to Chapter 6, “Scanner Support.”SAdded CAB extraction information and FTP Server parameters toChapter 7, “Programming.”SAdded imager option information via the Data Collection control panelapplet to Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets.”Note that this is for 700Series Computers using an imager.

7700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket PC 20022This chapter introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system fromMicrosoft Corporation.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 29700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2Note the “Software Build” information displayed beneath the VersionInformation title.Note: If you have an older software build, your unit may say either“PREM” (which indicates the Premium Edition) or “PRO” (which indicatesthe Professional Edition).3Tap t he Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer.Below is a list of components for each edition of Pocket PC 2002:ComponentPremiumEditionProfessionalEditionMicrosoft ActiveSync Client (page 29) XXMicrosoft Pocket Outlook (page 31) X XPocket Word (page 47) XXPocket Excel (page 52) X XMSN Messenger (page 53) XWindows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 57) XRAMMicrosoft Reader (page 58) XRAMPocket Internet Explorer (page 62) X XNote: Components marked with “RAM” are provided on a CompanionCD for download into RAM rather than burned into Flash ROM.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhere to Find InformationThis chapter describes your 700 Series Computer hardware, provides anoverview of the programs on your 700 Series Computer, and explains howto connect your 700 Series Computer to a desktop computer, a network,or the Internet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Series Computerand installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Card. The following is aguide to more information to assist you use your 700 Series Computer.For information on: See this source:Programs on your mobile computer. This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help,tap Start →Help.Additional programs that can be installed on the mobilecomputer.The Pocket PC Companion CD.Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop com-puter.The Quick Start Card or AutoSync Help on your desktopcomputer. To view Help, click Help →Microsoft Acti-veSync Help.Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSyncfolder on the desktop computer and on the Pocket PCCompanion CD.Up-to-date information on your Pocket PC. http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpcPocket PC and many of the technologies supported by the 700 SeriesComputer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities andfeatures on a Pocket PC device come directly from Microsoft without anymodification from Intermec Technologies. There may be certain Micro-soft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to sup-port, so you will have to contact Microsoft Corporation. Use these URLsto determine your Microsoft support options:Shttp://msdn.microsoft.com/support/Shttp://support.microsoft.com/Snews://news.microsoft.com (a free support option)

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 211700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBasic SkillsLearning to use your 700 Series Computer is easy. This describes the basicconcepts of using and customizing your 700 Series Computer.Buttons and StylusYour 700 Series Computer has hardware buttons that control actions andscroll functions, and a stylus for selecting items and entering information.On the 700 Series Computer, the stylus replaces the mouse.STap:Touch the screen once with the stylus to open items and select options.SDrag:Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select textand images. Drag in a list to select multiple items.STap and hold:Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available forthat item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action to be per-formed.Today ScreenWhen you turn on your 700 Series Computer for the first time each day(or after four hours of inactivity), you will see the Today screen. You canalso display it by tapping the Start flag (shown left) and then Today.Onthe Today screen, you can see at a glance important information for theday.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFollowing are some of the status icons you may see:Status Icon Meaning:Turns all sounds on and off.Backup battery is low.Main batteries are charging.Main batteries are low.Main batteries are very low.Main batteries are full.Connection is active.Synchronization is beginning or ending.Synchronization is occurring.Notification or one or more instant messages received.Notification of one or more e-mail messages received.If more notification icons need to be displayed than there isroom to display them, the Notification icon (shown left) willdisplay. Tap the icon to view all notification icons.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 213700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualProgramsYou can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Startmenu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. Forinformation, see “Adjusting Settings” on page 26.) To access someprograms, tap Start →Programs, and then the program name.You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your700 Series Computer has one or more program buttons located on thefront or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the pro-grams to which they switch.Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and holdthe stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command isnot carried out.The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 SeriesComputer. Look on the Pocket PC Companion CD for additional pro-grams that you can install onto your 700 Series Computer.ActiveSyncSynchronize information between your 700 Series Computer and desktopcomputer.CalendarKeep track of your appointments and create meeting requests.ContactsKeep track of your friends and colleagues.InboxSend and receive e-mail messages.Pocket Internet ExplorerBrowse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and downloadnew programs and files from the Internet.NotesCreate handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings.TasksKeep track of your tasks.Pocket ExcelCreate new workbooks or view and edit Excel workbooks created on yourdesktop computer.MSN MessengerSend and receive instant messages with your MSN Messenger contacts.Pocket WordCreate new documents or view and edit Word documents created on yourdesktop computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNavigation Bar and Command BarThe navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the activeprogram and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and closescreens.Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro-grams. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the InputPanel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New.Tosee the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag thestylus off the button so that the command is not carried out.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 215700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPop-up MenusWith pop-up menus, you can quickly choose an action for an item. Forexample, you can use the pop-up menu in the contact list to quickly deletea contact, make a copy of a contact, or send an e-mail message to a con-tact. The actions in the pop-up menus vary from program to program. Toaccess a pop-up menu, tap and hold the stylus on the item name that youwant to perform the action on. When the menu appears, lift the stylus,and tap the action you want to perform. Or tap anywhere outside themenu to close the menu without performing an action.NotificationsYour 700 Series Computer reminds you in a variety of ways when youhave something to do. For example, if you have set up an appointment inCalendar, a task with a due date in Tasks, or an alarm in Clock, you will benotified in any of the following ways:SA message box appears on the screen.SA sound, which you can specify, is played.SA light flashes on your 700 Series Computer.SA vibrator resonates from the 700 Series Computer.To choose reminder types and sounds for your 700 Series Computer, tapStart →Settings →the Personal tab →Sounds & Notifications. Theoptions you choose here apply throughout the 700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEnter Information on Your 700 Series ComputerYou have several options for entering new information:SUse the input panel to enter typed text, either by using the soft key-board or other input method.SWrite directly on the screen.SDraw pictures on the screen.SSpeak into your 700 Series Computer microphone to record a message.SUse Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information fromyour desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. For more infor-mation on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop computer.Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700Series Computer. You can either type using the soft keyboard or writeusing Block Recognizer,Letter Recognizer,orTranscriber. In either case,the characters appear as typed text on the screen.To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap thearrow next to the Input Panel button to see your choices.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 217700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhen you use the input panel, your 700 Series Computer anticipates theword you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel.When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at theinsertion point. The more you use your 700 Series Computer, the morewords it learns to anticipate.Note: To change word suggestion options, such as the number of wordssuggested at one time, tap Start →Settings →the Personal tab →Input→the Word Completion tab.Typing With the Soft Keyboard1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Keyboard.2On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus.Using Block RecognizerWith Block Recognizer, you can input character strokes using the stylusthat are similar to those used on other 700 Series Computers.1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Block Recognizer.2Write a letter in the box.When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on thescreen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with BlockRecognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Letter RecognizerWith Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as youwould on paper.1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Letter Recognizer.2Write a letter in the box.When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on thescreen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with LetterRecognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.Using TranscriberWith Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylusjust as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz-er, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and letTranscriber change the written characters to typed characters.1Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Transcriber.2Write anywhere on the screen.For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tapthe question mark in the lower right hand corner of the screen.Selecting Typed TextIf you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first.SDrag the stylus across the text you want to select.You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selectedwords and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or bytapping the command on the Edit menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 219700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWriting on the ScreenIn any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and inthe Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus towrite directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can editand format what you have written and convert the information to text at alater time.STap t he Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displays lineson the screen to help you write.Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button.See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writ-ing mode.Selecting the WritingIf you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first.1Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in-sertion point appears.2Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select.If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools →Undo and try again.You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and thendragging the stylus across the screen.You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work withtyped text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com-mand on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConverting Writing to TextSTap Tools →Recognize.If you want to convert only certain words, select them before tapping Rec-ognize on the Tools menu (or tap and hold the selected words and then tapRecognize on the pop-up menu). If a word is not recognized, it is left aswriting.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 221700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIf the conversion is incorrect, you can select different words from a list ofalternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the in-correct word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap Alterna-tes. A menu with a list of alternate words appears. Tap the word you wantto use, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the originalwriting.Tips for getting good recognition:SWrite neatly.SWrite on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the crossof the “t” and apostrophes below the top line so that they are not con-fused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the line.SFor better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% using theTools menu.SWrite the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words sothat the 700 Series Computer can easily tell where words begin and end.SHyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as ac-cents, and some punctuation cannot be converted.SIf you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a “3” to an“8”) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add willnot be included if you attempt to recognize the writing again.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDrawing on the ScreenYou can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen.The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se-lect items and how they can be edited. For example, selected drawings canbe resized, while writing cannot.Creating a DrawingSCross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Sub-sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra-wing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines will be treated aswriting.Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easilywork on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level.Selecting a DrawingIf you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first.STap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap-pears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and thendrag to select the drawings you want.You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding theselected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-upmenu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing,make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 223700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRecording a MessageIn any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can alsoquickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording amessage. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording inthe Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone record-ing or include a recording in a written note. If you want to include the re-cording in a note, open the note first. In the Inbox program, you can add arecording to an e-mail message.Creating a Recording1Hold your computer’ s microphone near your mouth or source ofsound.2Press and hold the Record hardware button on your 700 Series Com-puter until you hear a beep.3While holding down the Record button, make your recording.4To stop recording, release the Record button. Two beeps will sound.The new recording appears in the note list or as an embedded icon.Note: You can also make a recording by tapping the Record button on theRecording toolbar.To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing My TextWhen using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert pre-set or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a mes-sage, tap My Text and tap a message.Note: You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sendingit.To edit a My Text message, in the Tools menu, tap Edit →My Text Mes-sages. Select the message you wish to edit and make desired changes.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 225700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFinding and Organizing InformationThe Find feature on your 700 Series Computer helps you quickly locateinformation.Tap Start →Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, andthen tap Go to initiate the search.Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your700 Series Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type.You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Series Comput-er and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start →Programs →FileExplorer.Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the itemyou want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCustomizing Your 700 Series ComputerYou can customize your 700 Series Computer by adjusting settings andinstalling additional software.Adjusting SettingsYou can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options,tap Start →Settings →either the Personal tab or the System tab located atthe bottom of the screen. You might want to adjust the following:SClock:To change the time or to set alarms.SMenus:To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-upmenu from the New button.SOwner Information:To enter your contact information.SPassword:To limit access to your 700 Series Computer.SPower:To maximize battery life.SToday:To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen.Adding or Removing ProgramsPrograms added to your 700 Series Computer at the factory are stored inROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and youwill never accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be up-dated using special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All otherprograms and data files added to your 700 Series Computer after factoryinstallation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory).You can install any program created for your 700 Series Computer, as longas your 700 Series Computer has enough memory. The most popular placeto find software for your 700 Series Computer is on the Pocket PC Website (http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc).Adding Programs Using ActiveSyncYou will need to install the appropriate software for your 700 Series Com-puter on your desktop computer before installing it on your 700 SeriesComputer.1Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that youknow which version of the software to install. Tap Start →Settings →the System tab →About →the Version tab, then make a note of theinformation in Processor.2Download the program to your desktop computer (or insert the CD ordisk that contains the program into your desktop computer). You maysee a single *.XIP, *.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or severalversions of files for different 700 Series Computer types and processors.Be sure to select the program designed for the Pocket PC and your 700Series Computer processor type.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 227700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation thatcomes with the program. Many programs provide special installationinstructions.4Connect your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer.5Double-click the *.EXE file.SIf the file is an installer, the installation wizard will begin. Follow thedirections on the screen. Once the software has been installed on yourdesktop computer, the installer will automatically transfer the soft-ware to your 700 Series Computer.SIf the file is not an installer, you will see an error message stating thatthe program is valid but it is designed for a different type of comput-er. You will need to move this file to your 700 Series Computer. Ifyou cannot find any installation instructions for the program in theRead Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy theprogram file to the Program Files folder on your 700 Series Comput-er. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see Acti-veSync Help.Once installation is complete, tap Start →Programs, and then the pro-gram icon to switch to it.Adding a Program Directly from the Internet1Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that youknow which version of the software to install. Tap Start →Settings →the System tab →About →the Version tab, then make a note of theinformation in Processor.2Download the program to your 700 Series Computer straight from theInternet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files fordifferent 700 Series Computer types and processors. Be sure to select theprogram designed for the Pocket PC and your 700 Series Computerprocessor type.3Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation thatcomes with the program. Many programs provide installation instruc-tions.4Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file. The installation wizard willbegin. Follow the directions on the screen.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAdding a Program to the Start MenuTap Start →Settings →Menus →the Start Menu tab, and then the checkbox for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can eitheruse File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer to move the program to theStart Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop computer to create ashortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder.SUsing File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer:Tap Start →Programs →File Explorer, and locate the program (tap thefolder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device tosee a list of all folders on the 700 Series Computer). Tap and hold theprogram and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu fold-er located in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the win-dow, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu. The program will now appearon the Start menu. For more information on using File Explorer, see“Finding and Organizing Information” on page 25.SUsing ActiveSync on the desktop computer:Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Series Computerfiles and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then clickCreate Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in theWindows folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. Formore information, see ActiveSync Help.Removing ProgramsSTap Start →Settings →the System tab →Remove Programs.If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use FileExplorer on your 700 Series Computer to locate the program, tap and holdthe program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 229700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft ActiveSyncVisit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technicalinformation, and samples:Shttp://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc/downloads/activesync.aspUsing Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on yourdesktop computer with the information on your 700 Series Computer.Synchronization compares the data on your 700 Series Computer withyour desktop computer and updates both computers with the most recentinformation. For example:SKeep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 SeriesComputer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop computer.SSynchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Your files are automaticallyconverted to the correct formatNote: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all typesof information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and offfor specific information types.With ActiveSync, you can also:SBack up and restore your 700 Series Computer data.SCopy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Series Computerand desktop computer.SControl when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronizationmode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected toyour desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize com-mand.SSelect which information types are synchronized and control how muchdata is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks ofpast appointments you want synchronized.Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktopcomputer from the Pocket PC Companion CD. For more information oninstalling ActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is alreadyinstalled on your 700 Series Computer.After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con-nect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer, set up a part-nership so you can synchronize information between your 700 SeriesComputer and your desktop computer, and customize your synchroniza-tion settings. Your first synchronization process will automatically beginwhen you finish using the wizard.After your first synchronization, take a look at Calendar, Contacts, andTasks on your 700 Series Computer. You will notice that information youhave stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop computer has beencopied to your 700 Series Computer, and you did not have to type a word.Disconnect your 700 Series Computer from your computer and you areready to go!

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOnce you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronizationprocess, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Series Computer.To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start →ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you cansynchronize remotely from your 700 Series Computer.For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, startActiveSync on your desktop computer, and then see ActiveSync Help.For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer,switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 231700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft Pocket OutlookNote: The Professional Edition of Microsoft Pocket Outlook does not in-clude a spell checker.Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, andNotes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example,e-mail addresses stored in Contacts can be used to address e-mail messagesin Inbox.Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlookor Microsoft Exchange on your desktop computer with your 700 SeriesComputer. You can also synchronize this information directly with aMicrosoft Exchange server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSynccompares the changes you made on your 700 Series Computer and desk-top computer or server and updates both computers with the latest in-formation. For information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help onthe desktop computer.You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Startmenu.Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and MeetingsUse Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and otherevents. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Agenda,Day, Week, Month, and Year) and easily switch views by using the Viewmenu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: You can customize the Calendar display, such as changing the firstday of the week, by tapping Options on the Tools menu.Creating an Appointment1If you are in Day or Week view, tap the desired date and time for theappointment.2Tap New.3Using the input panel, enter a description and a location. Tap first toselect the field.4If needed, tap the date and time to change them.5Enter other desired information. You will need to hide the input panelto see all available fields.6To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create arecording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: CapturingThoughts and Ideas” on page 40.7When finished, tap OK to return to the calendar.Note:IfyouselectRemind me in an appointment, your 700 Series Com-puter will remind you according to the options set in Start →Settings →the Personal tab →Sounds & Reminders.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 233700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the Summary ScreenWhen you tap an appointment in Calendar, a summary screen is displayed.To change the appointment, tap Edit.Creating Meeting RequestsYou can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or PocketOutlook. The meeting request will be created automatically and sent eitherwhen you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to your e-mail server.Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools →Options. If you send and receive e-mail messages through ActiveSync,select ActiveSync.Scheduling a Meeting1Create an appointment.2In the appointment details, hide the input panel, and then tapAttendees.3From the list of e-mail addresses you have entered in Contacts, select themeeting attendees.The meeting notice is created automatically and placed in the Outboxfolder.For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, see Cal-endar Help and Inbox Help on the 700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualContacts: Tracking Friends and ColleaguesContacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you caneasily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at homeor on the road. Using the 700 Series Computer infrared (IR) port, you canquickly share Contacts information with other 700 Series Computer users.Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools →Options.Creating a Contact1Tap New.2Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. Youwill need to scroll down to see all available fields.3To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and se-lect a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contactsby category.4To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create arecording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: CapturingThoughts and Ideas” on page 40.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 235700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.Finding a ContactThere are four ways to find a contact:SIn the contact list, enter a contact name in the box under the navigationbar. To show all contacts again, clear text from the box or tap the buttonto the right of the box.SIn the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default)and select the type of contact that you want displayed. To show all con-tacts again, select All Contacts. To view a contact not assigned to a cate-gory, select None.STo view the names of companies your contacts work for, in the contactlist, tap View →By Company. The number of contacts that work forthat company will be displayed to the right of the company name.STap Start →Find, enter the contact name, select Contacts for the type,and then tap Go.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the Summary ScreenWhen you tap a contact in the contact list, a summary screen is displayed.To change the contact information, tap Edit.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 237700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTasks: Keeping a To Do ListUse Tasks to keep track of what you have to do.Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools →Options.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating a Task1Tap New.2Using the input panel, enter a description.3You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information byfirst tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you will need to hide itto see all available fields.4To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a categoryfrom the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category.5To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create arecording. For more information on creating notes, see “Notes: CapturingThoughts and Ideas” on page 40.6When finished, tap OK to return to the task list.Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on theTools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your taskinformation.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 239700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the Summary ScreenWhen you tap a task in the task list, a summary screen is displayed. Tochange the task, tap Edit.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNotes: Capturing Thoughts and IdeasQuickly capture thoughts, reminders, ideas, drawings, and phone numberswith Notes. You can create a written note or a recording. You can also in-clude a recording in a note. If a note is open when you create the record-ing, it will be included in the note as an icon. If the note list is displayed, itwill be created as a stand-alone recording.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 241700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating a Note1Tap New.2Create your note by writing, drawing, typing, and recording. For moreinformation about using the input panel, writing and drawing on thescreen, and creating recordings, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail MessagesUse Inbox to send and receive e-mail messages in either of these ways:SSynchronize e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or MicrosoftOutlook on your desktop computer.SSend and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mailserver through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a network.Synchronizing E-mail MessagesE-mail messages can be synchronized as part of the general synchronizationprocess. You will need to enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync. Forinformation on enabling Inbox synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on thedesktop computer. During synchronization:SMessages are copied from the mail folders of Exchange or Outlook onyour desktop computer to the ActiveSync folder in Inbox on your 700Series Computer. By default, you will receive messages from the pastthree days only, the first 100 lines of each message, and file attachmentsof less than 100 KB in size.SE-mail messages in the Outbox folder on your 700 Series Computer aretransferred to Exchange or Outlook, and then sent from those pro-grams.SE-mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on yourdesktop computer in order to be transferred.Connecting Directly to an E-mail ServerIn addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop computer,you can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail serverusing a modem or network card connected to your 700 Series Computer.You will need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and aconnection to your e-mail server. For more information, see “Getting Con-nected” on page 67.When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded tothe 700 Series Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Series Com-puter Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted on thee-mail server are removed from the 700 Series Computer Inbox folder.Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to youre-mail server rather than your desktop computer. When you delete a mes-sage on your 700 Series Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail serverthe next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync.You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and re-spond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sentas soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Series Computer.When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers orpartial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then de-cide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect,Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval andsends the messages you have composed.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 243700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the Message ListMessages you receive are displayed in the message list. By default, the mostrecently received messages are displayed first in the list.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhen you receive a message, tap it to open it. Unread messages are dis-played in bold.When you connect to your e-mail server or synchronize with your desktopcomputer, by default, you will receive messages from the last five daysonly, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file attachments of lessthan 100 KB in size. The original messages remain on the e-mail server oryour desktop computer.You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve in full during yournext synchronization or e-mail server connection. In the message list, tapand hold the message you want to retrieve. On the pop-up menu, tapMark for Download. The icons in the Inbox message list give you visualindications of message status.You specify your downloading preferences when you set up the service orselect your synchronization options. You can change them at any time:SChange options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options.For more information, see ActiveSync Help.SChange options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on your700 Series Computer. Tap Tools →Options →the Service tab, thentap the service you want to change. Tap and hold the service and selectDelete to remove a service.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 245700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualComposing MessagesTo compose a message:1Tap New.2In the To field, enter an e-mail or SMS address of one or more recipi-ents, separating them with a semicolon, or select a name from the con-tact list by tapping the Address Book button. All e-mail addresses en-tered in the e-mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book.3Compose your message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, tapMy Text and select a message.4Tap Send when you have finished the message. If you are working of-fline, the message is moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent thenext time you connect.If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received,tap Edit →Options →Request SMS text message delivery notificationbefore sending the message.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualManaging E-mail Messages and FoldersBy default, messages are displayed in one of five folders for each serviceyou have created: Inbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, Outbox, and Sent Items.The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have been deleted on the700 Series Computer. The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items foldersdepends on the options you have chosen. In the message list, tap Tools →Options →the Message tab, then select your options.If you want to organize messages into additional folders, tap Tools →Manage Folders to create new folders. To move a message to another fold-er, in the message list, tap and hold the message and then tap Move to onthe pop-up menu.Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail ServerThe behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are usingActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4.SIf you use ActiveSync:E-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook will automatically besynchronized with your 700 Series Computer. You can select to syn-chronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync. Thefolders you create and the messages you move will then be mirrored onthe server. For example, if you move two messages from the Inbox fold-er to a folder named Family, and you have designated Family for syn-chronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copiesthe messages into that folder. You can then read the messages while awayfrom your desktop computer.SIf you use SMS:Messages are stored in the Inbox folder.SIf you use POP3:and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is brokenbetween the messages on the 700 Series Computer and their copies onthe mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server will see thatthe messages are missing from the 700 Series Computer Inbox and de-lete them from the server. This prevents you from having duplicate cop-ies of a message, but it also means that you will no longer have access tomessages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the700 Series Computer.SIf you use IMAP4:The folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirroredon the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you con-nect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Series Computeror desktop computer. This synchronization of folders occurs wheneveryou connect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename/deletefolders when connected.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 247700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCompanion ProgramsThe companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, MicrosoftPocket Excel, Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, and MicrosoftReader. To switch to a companion program on your 700 Series Computer,tap Start →Programs, then tap the program name.Pocket WordPocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop computer togive you easy access to copies of your documents. You can create new doc-uments on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy documents fromyour desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronize docu-ments between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Computer sothat you have the most up-to-date content in both locations.Creating a DocumentUse Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters, meeting minutes,and trip reports. To create a new file, tap Start →Programs →PocketWord →New. A blank document appears. Or, if you have selected a tem-plate for new documents in the Options dialog box, that template appearswith appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open onlyone document at a time; when you open a second document, you will beasked to save the first. You can save a document you create or edit in a va-riety of formats, including Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich TextFormat (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT).

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket Word contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,tap and hold a file in the list. Then, select the appropriate action on thepop-up menu.You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing,writing, drawing, and recording), which are displayed on the View menu.Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tappingthe Show/Hide Toolbar button on the command bar.Note: You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View →Zoom,then select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to entertext and a lower one to see more of your document.If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop computer, selectWrap to Window on the View menu so that you can see the entiredocument.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 249700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTyping ModeUsing the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more infor-mation on entering typed text, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can selecttext as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouseto drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document tofind text by tapping Edit →Find/Replace.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWriting ModeIn writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruledlines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater thanin typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information onwriting and selecting writing, see “Basic Skills” on page 11.Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writingbecomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in“Drawing Mode” on the next page.Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Worddocument is converted to a Word document on your desktop computer.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 251700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDrawing ModeIn drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appearas a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke,you will see a drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing. Everysubsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of thedrawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see“Basic Skills” on page 11.Recording ModeIn recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordings aresaved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see “Basic Skills”on page 11.For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket ExcelPocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on your desktop computer togive you easy access to copies of your workbooks. You can create newworkbooks on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy workbooksfrom your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronizeworkbooks between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Comput-er so that you have the most up-to-date content in both locations.Creating a WorkbookUse Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileagelogs. To create a new file, tap Start →Programs →Pocket Excel →New.A blank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for newworkbooks in the Options dialog box, that template appears withappropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only oneworkbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, you will be askedto save the first. You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety offormats, including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS).Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files,tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action from thepop-up menu.Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas,functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View →Toolbar.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 253700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect itwith a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit →Password.Ev-ery time you open the workbook, you will need to enter the password, sochoose one that is easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess.Tips for Working in Pocket ExcelNote the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:SView in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible.Tap View →Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore.SShow and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elementsyouwanttoshoworhide.SFreeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want tofreeze panes. Tap View →Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze thetop and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labelsvisible as you scroll through a sheet.SSplit panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View →Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split,tap View →Remove Split.SShow and hide rows and columns. To hide a hidden row or column, se-lect a cell in the row or column you want to hide. Then tap Format ,Row or Column →Hide. To show a hidden row or column, tap Tools→Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row or co-lumn. Then tap Format →Row or Column →Unhide.For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start →Help.MSN MessengerNote: MSN Messenger is only available on the Premium Edition of PocketPC 2002.MSN Messenger on your 700 Series Computer is an instant messagingprogram that lets you:SSee who is online.SSend and receive instant messages.SHave instant message conversations with groups of contacts.To use MSN Messenger, you must have a Microsoft Passport account or aMicrosoft Exchange e-mail account. You must have a Passport to use MSNMessenger Service. If you have a Hotmail or MSN account, you alreadyhave a Passport. Once you have obtained either a Microsoft Passport or aMicrosoft Exchange account, you are ready to set up your account.SSign up for a Microsoft Passport account at http://www.passport.com.SGet a free Microsoft Hotmail e-mail address at http://www.hotmail.com.To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start →Programs →MSN Messenger.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetting UpBefore you can connect, you must enter Passport or Exchange account in-formation. To set up an account and sign in:1In the Tools menu, tap Options.2In the Accounts tab, enter your Passport or Exchange account informa-tion.3To sign in, tap the sign-in screen and enter your e-mail address and pass-word.Note: If you already use MSN Messenger on your desktop computer, yourcontacts will show up on your 700 Series Computer without being addedagain.Working with ContactsThe MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at aglance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view,while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chat-ting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu.Note: To see others online without being seen, in the Tools menu, tap MyStatus →Appear Offline.If you block a contact, you will appear offline but will remain on theblocked contact’ s list. To unblock a contact, tap and hold the contact, thentap Unblock on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 255700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualChatting with ContactsTap a contact name to open a chat window. Enter your message in the textentry area at the bottom of the screen, or tap My Text to enter a presetmessage, and tap Send. To invite another contact to a multi-user chat, inthe Tools menu, tap Invite and tap the contact you want to invite.Note: To switch back to the main window without closing a chat, tap theContacts button. To revert back to your chat window, tap Chats and selectthe person whom you were chatting with.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTo know if the contact you are chatting with is responding, look for themessage under the text entry area.For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 257700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWindows Media Player for Pocket PCUse Microsoft Windows Media Player for Pocket PC to play digital audioand video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a net-work. To switch to Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, tap Start →Programs →Windows Media.Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop computer to copydigital audio and video files to your Pocket PC. You can play WindowsMedia and MP3 files on your Pocket PC.For more information about using Windows Media Player for Pocket PC,tap Start →Help.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicrosoft ReaderUse Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Series Computer.Download books to your desktop computer from your favorite eBook Website. Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 Se-ries Computer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tapthem in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an op-tional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:SPage through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700 Se-ries Computer or by tapping the page number on each page.SAnnotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings.SSearch for text and look up definitions for words.The Guidebook contains all the information you will need to use the soft-ware. To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or,on a book page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on thepop-up menu. To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start →Programs →Microsoft Reader.Getting Books on Your 700 Series ComputerYou can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBookretailer and follow the instructions to download the book files.Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder inthe Extras folder on the Pocket PC Companion CD.Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop computer to youractivated mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in theMSReader folder.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 259700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing the LibraryThe Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books storedon your 700 Series Computer or storage card. To open the Library:1On the Reader command bar, tap Library.2On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-upmenu.3To open a book, tap its title in the Library list.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualReading a BookEach book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and thepages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion ofthe cover page.The first time you open a book, you will probably want to go to the firstpage or to the table of contents, if there is one. Subsequently, wheneveryou open the book, you will be automatically taken to the last page read.In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and booktitle.You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down control on your700 Series Computer.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 261700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Reader FeaturesReading a book electronically gives you several options not available withpaper books. These options are available from any book page.Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option onthe pop-up menu, as described here:SSearching for TextFind text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter theword you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Readerhighlights found text on the page. To close Find, tap outside the box.To return to your original page, tap the title and then tap Return on thepop-up menu.SCopying TextYou can copy text from books that support this feature into any pro-gram that accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to copy.Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted intothe program of your choice.SAdding BookmarksWhen you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark iconappears in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book.Then, from anywhere in the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to thebookmarked page.SHighlighting TextWhen you highlight text, it appears with a colored background.SAttaching Notes to TextWhen you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that ap-pears on top of the book page. A Note icon will display in the left mar-gin. To show or hide the note, tap the icon.SAdding DrawingsWhen you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-leftcorner of the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of thepage. Draw by dragging your stylus.SAnnotations IndexTo see a list of a book’ s annotations, including bookmarks, highlights,text notes, and drawings, tap Annotations Index on the book’ s coverpage. You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page.Removing a BookWhen you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space onyour 700 Series Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desktopcomputer, you can download it again at any time.To remove a book from your 700 Series Computer, tap and hold the titlein the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPocket Internet ExplorerNote: The Professional Edition of Pocket Internet Explorer does not sup-port WAP pages.Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in ei-ther of these ways:SDuring synchronization with your desktop computer, download yourfavorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favor-ites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer.SConnect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, you willneed to create the connection first, as described in “Getting Connected”on page 67.When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files andprograms from the Internet or intranet.To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer, tap Start →Internet Explorer.The Mobile Favorites FolderOnly items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folderin Internet Explorer on your desktop computer will be synchronized withyour 700 Series Computer. This folder was created automatically whenyou installed ActiveSync.Favorite LinksDuring synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favoritesfolder on your desktop computer is synchronized with Pocket Internet Ex-plorer on your 700 Series Computer. Both computers are updated withchanges made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you markthe favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link will be downloaded toyour 700 Series Computer, and you will need to connect to your ISP ornetwork to view the content. For more information on synchronization,see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.Mobile FavoritesIf you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktopcomputer, you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Series Comput-er. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700Series Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnectedfrom your ISP and desktop computer.Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mo-bile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:1In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click Tools →CreateMobile Favorite.2To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box.3Optionally, in Update, select a desired update schedule.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 263700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page toyour desktop computer.5If you want to download the pages that are linked to the mobile favoriteyou just created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer,right-click the mobile favorite just created and then click Properties.Inthe Download tab, specify the number of links deep you want todownload. To conserve 700 Series Computer memory, go only one leveldeep.6Synchronize your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Mobilefavorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Ex-plorer are downloaded to your 700 Series Computer.Note: If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3 above, you willneed to manually download content to keep the information updated onyour desktop computer and 700 Series Computer. Before synchronizingwith your 700 Series Computer, in Internet Explorer on your desktopcomputer, click Tools →Synchronize. You will see the last time contentwas downloaded to the desktop computer, and you can manually downloadcontent if needed.You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobilefavorites. In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click View →Toolbars →Customize.Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Series Computer.To minimize the amount of memory used:SIn the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync options,turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites from beingdownloaded to the 700 Series Computer. For more information, see Ac-tiveSync Help.SLimit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer onthe desktop computer, right-click the mobile favorite you want tochange and then Properties.IntheDownload tab, specify “0” or “1” forthe number of linked pages you want to download.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 265700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Pocket Internet ExplorerYou can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and chan-nels that have been downloaded to your 700 Series Computer withoutconnecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet throughan ISP or a network connection and browse the Web.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualViewing Mobile Favorites and Channels1Tap t he Favorites button to display your list of favorites.2Tap the page you want to view.You will see the page that was downloaded the last time you synchronizedwith your desktop computer. If the page is not on your 700 Series Com-puter, the favorite will be dimmed. You will need to synchronize with yourdesktop computer again to download the page to your 700 Series Comput-er, or connect to the Internet to view the page.Browsing the Internet1Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec-tions, as described in “Getting Connected” on page 67.2To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:STap t he Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view.STap View →Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the topof the screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tapGo. Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Series Computer, go tothe page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add toFavorites.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 267700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetting ConnectedYou can use your 700 Series Computer to exchange information with oth-er 700 Series Computers as well as your desktop computer, a network, orthe Internet. You have the following connection options:SUse the infrared (IR) port on your 700 Series Computer to send andreceive files between two 700 Series Computers. If this is the methodyou want to use, see “Transferring Items Using Infrared”below.SConnect to your ISP. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mailmessages by using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using PocketInternet Explorer. The communication software for creating an ISP con-nection is already installed on your 700 Series Computer. Your serviceprovider will provide software needed to install other services, such aspaging and fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see “Con-necting to an Internet Service Provider” on page 68.SConnect to the network at your company or organization where youwork. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages byusing Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer,and synchronize with your desktop computer. If this is the method youwant to use, see “Connecting to Work” on page 70.SConnect to your desktop computer to synchronize remotely. Once con-nected, you can synchronize information such as your Pocket Outlookinformation. If this is the method you want to use, see ActiveSync Helpon your desktop computer or Connections Help on the 700 SeriesComputer.Transferring Items Using InfraredUsing infrared (IR), you can send and receive information, such as con-tacts and appointments, between two 700 Series Computers.Sending Information1Switch to the program where you created the item you want to send andlocate the item in the list.2Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a closerange.3Tap and hold the item, and tap Beam Item on the pop-up menu.Note: You can also send items, but not folders, from File Explorer. Tapand hold the item you want to send, and then tap Beam File on the pop-up menu.Receiving Information1Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a closerange.2Have the owner of the other 700 Series Computer send the informationto you. Your 700 Series Computer will automatically receive it.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConnecting to an Internet Service ProviderYou can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receivee-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to yourISP in one of two ways:SCreate a modem connection. If this is the method you want to use, see“Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP”below.SUse an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this isthe method you want to use, see “Creating an Ethernet Connection to anISP” on page 69.Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP1Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require in-formation in front of the user name, such as MSN/username.SISP dial-up access telephone numberSUser nameSPasswordSTCP/IP settings2If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install amodem card, or use or use a NULL modem cable and appropriateadapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Series Computerthrough the serial port.3Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.UnderThe Internet settings, select Internet Settings →Modify.4In the Modem tab, tap New.5Enter a name for the connection, such as “ISP Connection.”6In Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem typedoes not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using an ex-ternal modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer with acable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”7You should not need to change any settings in Advanced.MostISPsnow use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connectingto does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced →theTCP/IP tab, then enter the address. When finished, tap OK →Next.8Enter the access phone number, and tap Next.9Select other desired options, and tap Finish.10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phonetype (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-tions you create.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 269700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTo start the connection, simply start using one of the following programs.Your 700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-nected, you can:SSend and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can useInbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicatewith the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directlyto an E-mail Server” on page 72.SVisit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For moreinformation, see “Pocket Internet Explorer” on page 62.SSend and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-formation, see “MSN Messenger” on page 53.Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP1You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernetor purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your700 Series Computer.2Obtain the following information from your ISP:SUser nameSPasswordSDomain name3Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner’ s manual.If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in a dock,tap Start →Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ethernet icon(shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAYpop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from the menu.4The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appearautomatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Mostnetworks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settingsunless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK.(Ifitdoes not appear or to change settings later, tap Start →Settings →theConnections tab →Network, tap the adapter you want to change, andthen tap Properties.)SIf using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start →Settings →theConnections tab →Network Adapters. Select “NE2000 CompatibleEthernet Driver” from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-ties to configure the Ethernet driver.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual5Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a networkcable. For information, see your owner’ s manual.6Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.Fromthe My network card connects to list, select “Internet.”To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed inthe preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-ties as listed in the preceding section.Connecting to WorkIf you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages,view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Series Computer, and possiblyaccess the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two ways:SCreate a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server) ac-count. Before you can create this modem connection, your network ad-ministrator will need to set up a RAS account for you. If this is themethod you want to use, see “Creating a Modem Connection to Work”below. Your network administrator may also give you VPN settings.SUse an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this isthe method you want to use, see “Creating an Ethernet Connection toWork” on page 71.Creating a Modem Connection to Work1Get the following information from your network administrator:SDial-up access telephone numberSUser nameSPasswordSDomain nameSTCP/IP settings2If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install amodem card.3Tap Start →Settings →the Connections tab →Connections.UnderThe Internet settings, select Internet Settings and tap Modify.4In the Modem tab, tap New.5Enter a name for the connection, such as “Company Connection.”6In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modemtype does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are usingan external modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer witha cable, select “Hayes Compatible on COM1.”7You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most serversnow use a dynamically-assigned address. If the server you are connectingto does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced →theTCP/IP tab and then enter the address. When finished, tap OK →Next.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 271700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual8Enter the access phone number, and tap Next.9Select other desired options, and tap Finish.10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phonetype (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-tions you create.To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Your700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-nected, you can:SSend and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can useInbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicatewith the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see “Connecting Directlyto an E-mail Server” on page 72.SVisit Internet or intranet Web or WAP pages via Pocket Internet Explor-er.SSend and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-formation, see “MSN Messenger” on page 53.SSynchronize. For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktopcomputer.Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work1You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernetor purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your700 Series Computer.2Obtain the following information from your ISP:SUser nameSPasswordSDomain name3Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner’ s manual.SIf using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in adock, tap Start →Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ether-net icon (shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for theNDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from themenu.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appearautomatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Mostnetworks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settingsunless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK.(Ifitdoes not appear or to change settings later, tap Start →Settings →theConnections tab →Network, tap the adapter you want to change, andthen tap Properties.)SIf using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start →Settings →theConnections tab →Network Adapters. Select “NE2000 CompatibleEthernet Driver” from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-ties to configure the Ethernet driver.5Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a networkcable. For information, see your owner’ s manual.6To synchronize your 700 Series Computer, tap Start →ActiveSync.Inthe Tools menu, tap Options.→the PC tab, select Include PC whensynchronizing remotely and connect to, and select your computer’ sname. Remote synchronization with a desktop computer will work onlyif a partnership is set up with that computer through ActiveSync andActiveSync is set to allow remote connections. Other restrictions apply.For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed inthe preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-ties as listed in the preceding section.Ending a ConnectionTo disconnect, do one of the following:SWhen connected via dial-up or VPN, tap the Connection icon (shownleft) on your navigation bar, and then tap End.SWhen connected via cable or cradle, detach your 700 Series Computerfrom the cable or cradle.SWhen connected via Infrared, move the 700 Series Computer awayfrom the PC.SWhen connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card fromyour 700 Series Computer.Connecting Directly to an E-mail ServerYou can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send andreceive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In-box on your 700 Series Computer.Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server andan SMTP gateway.You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For each e-mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. Ifyou use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up andname each mailbox connection.

Pocket PC 2002—Chapter 273700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetting Up an E-mail ServiceSIn Inbox on your 700 Series Computer, tap Services →New Service.Follow the directions in the New Service wizard.For an explanation of a screen, tap Start →Help. When finished, to con-nect to your e-mail server, tap Services →Connect. For more informationon using the Inbox program, see “Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Mes-sages” on page 42.

Pocket PC 2002Chapter —274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

75700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInstalling Applications3There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series ColorMobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the applica-tion for delivery.

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —376 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPackaging an ApplicationUse any of the following methods to package an application for installa-tion:SFor very simple applications, the application itself might be the only filethat needs to be delivered.SIt could be a directory structure that contains the application, support-ing files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files.SVia a CAB file.Consider either of the following when choosing a location into which tostore your application:SIn the basic 700 Series Computer, there are no built-in storage optionsother than the Object Store. The Object Store is RAM that looks like adisk. Anything copied here will be deleted when a cold-boot is per-formed on the 700 Series Computer.SIf the optional SecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card is in the sys-tem, then consider this card the primary location for placing an applica-tions install files. The following folders represent either card:SThe SecureDigital storage card creates the “\SDMMC Disk” folder.SThe CompactFlash storage card creates the “\Storage Card” folder.SFiles copied to either of these locations will be safe when a cold-boot isperformed on a 700 Series Computer - providing the AutoRun system isinstalled onto the storage card. You can find this system on the RecoveryCD. Copying a CAB file to the “\CABFILES” folder on one of thesecards will automatically extract that CAB file on every cold boot to en-sure that your system is properly set up. See page 82 for more details onhow this works.Installing ApplicationsConsider any of the following options to get the package to the preferredlocation on your 700 Series Computer.SMicrosoft ActiveSyncSFTP Server (page 78)SApplication Manager in Unit Manager (page 78)SSecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card (page 78)$

Installing Applications—Chapter 377700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Microsoft ActiveSyncNote: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Toolsportion of the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD was installed onto yourdesktop.The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700C Companion CD,which contains Microsoft products, such as Outlook and ActiveSync. SeeChapter 2, “Pocket PC 2002,” for information about this tool as providedby Microsoft Corporation.This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync con-nection. Files can then be copied using File Explorer on a PC or a laptopcomputer. This option is usually only good when updating a few 700 Se-ries Computers.These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync had been installedonto your desktop computer and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter2, “Pocket PC 2002,” for an URL from which you can download the latestapplication.1Connect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer via anActiveSync cable or IrDA.2Wait for a “Connected” message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSyncapplication to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If neces-sary, select File →Get Connected to initiate a connection.3Click Explore to access the Mobile Device directory on your 700 SeriesComputer.

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —378 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4From your desktop, select Start →Windows Explorer, then browse theapplicable path for any of the system files needed for your 700 SeriesComputer (listed with their paths). Select to highlight the appropriatefile, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy.SBase operating system files:“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Drive Images”SCAB files:“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files”5Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where you wantthe files located on the 700 Series Computer, do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste.6When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 SeriesComputer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the topleft of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start →Programs →File Ex-plorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these files toactivate their utilities.Using the FTP ServerThe 700 Series Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a net-work via Ethernet or 802.11b. This “ftp”s to the IP address of the 700 Se-ries Computer and places files. The benefit of using FTP is that a scriptcan be created that will automate the process of copying files to the 700Series Computer. This option is good for when a large number of 700 Se-ries Computers need to be updated. See Chapter 7, “Programming,” formore information.Using the Application Manager in Unit ManagerThis requires the 700 Series Computer to connect to the network viaEthernet or 802.11b. The process is still manual so it would take longerthan the FTP method but it would still be a better option than ActiveSyncwhere many 700 Series Computers need to be updated. The Unit Managerapplications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM.For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative.Using a Storage CardThe following steps pertain to installing an application using a storagecard.Copying to a CompactFlash CardFollow the steps below to install your application on the device using aCompactFlash storage card:1Suspend the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and remove its Com-pactFlash drive, which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card.2Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash Drive inyour desktop PC card drive.$

$Installing Applications—Chapter 379700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual3Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which tostore your application.4Add the autorun system to the storage card using the CEImagerapplication. See the Software Tools User’ s Manual for information aboutCEImager.5Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers tothe subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive.6Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the“\Storage Card\2577” directory that contains the following statement,where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage cardwhere the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of yourapplication. Finish the “RUN=” statement with a carriage return line-feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file.RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>7Remove the CompactFlash drive from your desktop computer and rein-stall it into the 700 Series Computer.8Warm-boot the 700 Series Computer to add these files to the Compact-Flash storage card.If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the “RUN=” statement is cor-rect, then the task manager will launch and execute your program on start-up.Copying to a SecureDigital Storage CardDo the same steps as for the CompactFlash storage Card, except replacethe “\Storage Card\2577” directory with the “\SDMMC Disk\2577” direc-tory.Updating the System SoftwareYou can use the Recovery CD to reinstall or update the operating systemsoftware on the 700 Series Color Computer. For more information, con-tact your Intermec sales representative.$

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —380 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualApplication MigrationNote: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Toolsportion of the 700C Software Tools CD was installed onto your desktopand that a storage card has been added to the base configuration of the 700Color Computer.The following steps are required to ensure that the following will happenon a cold-boot:SCAB files can be restored,Sapplications will automatically start,Sand the registry will be restored.Do the following for the cold-boot procedure:1From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop iconto access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on yourdesktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the“C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager” folder.2Click Default under Components List to activate the components.3Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to ex-pand the Destination Media option, then select either the Compact-Flash Card option or the SecureDigital Card option. Do not select bothstorage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one storage card, butnot work on the other storage card.$

$Installing Applications—Chapter 381700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card.5Create a “\Cabfiles” folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files thatare to be extracted on every startup into this folder.6In the “\2577” directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. Seethe Recovery Help for more information on how to set up anAUTOUSER.DAT file.7If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a spe-cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; oryou can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows:aFrom the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings →the Systemtab →the Utilities icon →the Registry Save tab.bTap Enable Registry Storage, then tap either of the following:SSDTo write the registry to the SecureDigital storage card.SCFTo write the registry to the CompactFlash storage card.cTap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet.Note: If you are using a SecureDigital storage card, you must change anydisk access from “Storage Card” to “SDMMC Disk.”8Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card intothe 700 Series Color Computer.9Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Series Color Computer. Files willautomatically install from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to theRegFlushKey() API will automatically write the registry to theappropriate location.$

$Installing ApplicationsChapter —382 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWhen converting a 700 Series Monochrome Computer application to runon the 700 Series Color Computer, most APIs should work without chan-ges. Below are a few exceptions:SThe 700 Series Monochrome Computer used the “\Storage Card” folderfor nonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to storedata in a volatile location or onto the “SDMMC Disk” if a SecureDigi-tal storage card is present in the system.SIf the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify thatthe proper media is available in the system and call the special API men-tioned in Step 7 on the previous page.SIf the application will be using the 700 Color switchable dock, use theAPI to set the proper port on the dock before communications.SSome WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio sectionto determine if any changes will be required in your application.SThe arrow and tab keys are swapped from the way they were on the 700Series Monochrome Computers. Keyboard remapping is available onthe 700 Series Color Computer if these keys need to be changed. Seepage 79 for more details.SNo special SDK is needed to compile applications for the Xscale proces-sor. Targeting the SA1110 processor will create applications that run onthe 700 Series Color Computer.Cabinet File InstallationCAB files (short for cabinet files) are like .ZIP files, plus they register DLLs,create shortcuts, modify registry entries, and run custom set up programs.Tap a CAB file to extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the ap-proved storage devices in the “\Cab Files” folder, then perform a warm-boot on the 700 Series Computer. There are two methods available to ex-tract a CAB file:STap a CAB file to extract it. When using this method, the CAB file isautomatically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unlessthe CAB file is set with the read-only attribute.SUse the AUTOCAB method where all files are extracted when a cold-boot is performed on the 700 Series Computer. This AutoCab applica-tion is on the Recovery CD, see its “Recovery Help” for more informa-tion.$

83700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork Support4The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios ina single unit, and will automatically install the appropriate software for ra-dio use when the unit is powered on. The Intermec CORE applicationdefaults to the most recently used module. If a module has not yet beenused or set, CORE will default to the first module as listed alphabetically.The following communication options on the 700 Series Computer pro-vide wired and wireless connectivity:SOnboard wired Ethernet (standard)SWireless Local Area Network (LAN)This 802.11b radio option provides up to 11 Mb/sec throughput.SWireless Wide Area Network (WAN)Includes support for GSM/GPRS and CDMA/1xRTT radios.SWireless PrintingThis allows for cable-free communications with peripheral devices, suchas printers, over a ten-meter range. This compatibility is provided via aBluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications.

Network SupportChapter —484 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCOREThe Intermec Common Object Resource Environment (CORE) applica-tion provides a framework for various modules that let you configure andmanage your Intermec products. These modules are software plug-ins thatcan be configuration tools, such as the 802.11b radio configuration mod-ule, or they can provide information on your environment, such as a bat-tery life module.CORE is built into the operating system of every 700 Series Computer.On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Programs →the IntermecCORE icon to access this application.CORE modules are collections of specific information. This information isusually related to a particular radio technology, but not always. Eachmodule can display general and detailed information. Tap the General andDetails tabs near the bottom to switch between general and detailedinformation. Note that not all modules will have detailed information.To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start →Help from the menu to see the CORE online help.Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its iconfrom the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start →Today →theIntermec CORE three-ring icon (circled in the following illustration).

Network Support—Chapter 485700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNetwork AdaptersYour 700 Series Computer can have up to three radios installed. The de-fault network adapter or radio is dependent on what card is inserted inyour 700 Computer. Below are the the network adapters that exist as ofthis publication. See the Developer’s Support web site for the latest infor-mation on network adapters for your unit.Ethernet Communications (LAN9000) - page 86.802.11b Radios (802.11b Wireless LAN driver) - page 87.WWAN (Wireless WAN) - page 110.Wireless Printing (PAN) - page 120.Note that the tip of the antenna attached to your 700 Series Computer iscolor-coded to identify its radio type. Refer to the following to determineyour radio type:Green802.11b diversityRedCDMA (non-Sprint networks)WhiteGPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networksBlueGPRS International

Network SupportChapter —486 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEthernet CommunicationsFollow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 SeriesComputer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b radio, thenEthernet networking using DHCP will be selected as the default.When “Built-in Ethernet” is selected from the NDISTRY pop-up menu,then the antenna shown to the left will appear in the System Tray. When“No networking” is selected, then this icon will appear with a red “X”above it.From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings →the Connectionstab →Network Adapters to access the network connections for this unit.Make the changes necessary for your network, then tap ok when finished.Note: “LAN9000” is for Ethernet and ”802.11b Wireless LAN” is for802.11b radios.

Network Support—Chapter 491700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual802.11 WEP Encryption:WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There aretwo types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). These can be entered aseither ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435).To enter WEP keys, select “802.11 WEP Encryption” from the SecurityMethod drop-down list. Select a data transmission key from the Data TXKey drop-down list near the bottom of this screen, then enter the encryp-tion key for that data transmission in the appropriate Key # field.

Network SupportChapter —492 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual802.1x TLS (Transport Layer Security):TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applica-tions and their users on the Internet. To use this protocol, select “802.1xTLS” from the Security Method drop-down list, then enter the following:SClient Key File:Enter the file location where the certificate for your identity is stored.SPassword:Enter the password for the certificate in this field.SSupplicant ID:Enter the user ID associated with this certificate.SServer Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):Enter the common name of your authentication server.SCA List (Certificate Authority):Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates.

Network Support—Chapter 493700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual802.1x TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS):To use this protocol, select “802.1x TTLS” from the Security Methoddrop-down list, then enter the following:SUsername:Enter your user name for this security protocol.SPassword:Enter your password for this security protocol.SSupplicant ID:Enter “anonymous” unless your administrator indicates otherwise.SServer Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):Enter the common name of your authentication server.SCA List:Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates.LEAP (Cisco Wireless EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)):Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol.

Network Support—Chapter 495700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCertificatesUse this page to view, modify, or remove certificates assigned to yourparticular security method. Note that you can also access this page by tappingStart →certificates from the Today screen.SCA Name/IP:Enter a valid CA name or IP address assigned to the certificate in ques-tion. This allows you to enroll the certificate or to browse for its latestinformation.SEnroll File Name:Enter the file name of the certificate to be enrolled.SStore Location:Enter the path where the certificate is to be stored within your 700 Se-ries Computer.SEnroll:Tap this to assign the file entered in Enroll File Name to the locationspecified in Store Location.SCA Vert:Tap this to view the contents of the certificate via the Internet Explorer.SView:Tap this to view information about the certificate, such as to whom thiscertificate was issued, who issued the certificate, and the span of timethe certificate is valid.SRemove:Select a file from the list, then tap this button to delete that file.

$Network Support—Chapter 499700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual#include <winioctl.h>#include “sysio.h”void DoLoad(int nDevice) {LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWV1:”) };HANDLE hLoaderDev;DWORD bytesReturned;hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,&bytesReturned, NULL)){MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”), TEXT(“Networkloader”),MB_ICONHAND);if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle}else {CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);}}}void DoUnload(int nDevice) {LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(“SYI1:”), _T(“FWV1:”) };HANDLE hLoaderDev;DWORD bytesReturned;hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0,NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,&bytesReturned, NULL)){MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(“SYSIO IoControl Failed”),TEXT(“Networkloader”),MB_ICONHAND);if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle}else {CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);}}}$

Network SupportChapter —4100 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of rou-tines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802.11b networkinterface card from within their application. The routines provided willalso read/write values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802.11b radiodriver. By using the provided functions, a programmer can alter the802.11b parameters of Network Name (SSID), WEP Keys, InfrastructureModes, Radio Channel, and Power Management Modes. A programmercan also retrieve network connect status and signal strength indicationfrom the RF network card.The API is contained within the 80211API.DLL file that should be pres-ent in any load that has the 802.11b networking installed.SNETWLAN.DLLThis file is the 802.11b driver. It will be present in all 700 CE loads thatuse the 802.11b network interface card.S80211API.DLLThis file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer witha set of API calls to configure or monitor status of the 802.11b network.SMOD80211.DLLThe CORE module for the 802.11b NIC. It provides the 802.11b sta-tus information displayed when the CORE application is running.S80211CONF.EXEThis is the “Control Panel” for configuring the 802.11b network para-meters. Note that it is an EXE file and is actually called byCPL802.CPL (see below). It is also called by the CORE applicationwhen the “Configuration” button is pressed.SCPL802.CPLA control panel application that does nothing but call80211CONF.EXE.S80211SCAN.EXEInternally manages the Scan List activity.The 80211API.DLL supports an unlimited number of radio configurationprofiles. These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Networkcontrol panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit. You can configuredifferent 802.11b profiles and switch between them using the 802.11 API.See the ConfigureProfile() function on page 106 for more information.

Network Support—Chapter 4101700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFunction SummaryBelow are functions available for the 700 Series Color Computer whenenabled with the 802.11b radio module.RadioConnect()Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using alot of API calls that talk directly to the radio.Syntax: UINT RadioConnect( );Parameters: None.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwiseERR_CONNECT_FAILED.RadioDisconnect()Cleans up the connection from the RadioConnect() function after an ap-plication closes.Syntax: UINT RadioDisconnect( );Parameters: None.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwiseERR_CONNECT_FAILED.GetMac()Gets the radio MAC address.Syntax: UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with MAC addresses.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetBSSID()Gets the associated access point name, the BSSID.Syntax: UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failedGetSSID()Gets the current SSID (network name).Syntax: UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network SupportChapter —4102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetLinkSpeed()Retrieves the current link speed of the radio connection.Syntax: UINT GetLinkSpeed( int &);Parameters: &References an integer.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetNetworkType()Retrieves the network type.Syntax: UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH Frequency Hopping RadioNDIS_NET_TYPE_DS Direct Sequence RadioNDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINEDUnknown or information not available.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetTXPower()Gets the current TX power of the radio in milliwatts.Syntax: UINT GetTXPower( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the followingin milliwatts (mW):NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 63 mW.NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30 30 mW.NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15 15 mW.NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 5mW.NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1 1mW.NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWNUnknown Value or Error.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network Support—Chapter 4103700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetNetworkMode()Retrieves the network mode.Syntax: UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS 802.11 Infrastructure Mode.NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Unknown Value or Error.NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWNAutomatic Selection. Use of this option is not recommended.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.SetNetworkMode()Sets the radio and updates the CE registry.Syntax: UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value, populated with one of the values definedin GetNetworkMode().Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.AddWep()Adds a WEP key to the radio configuration.Syntax: UINT AddWep( ULONG 1, BOOL 2, TCHAR * 3);Parameters: ULONG Pointer that identifies what key to be set.BOOL Specifies whether the key being set is the default TX key.TCHAR Pointer that specifies the key data either in hex (stringlengths of 10 or 26) or ASCII (string lengths of 5 or 13).Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetRSSI()Sets the current RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).Syntax: UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );Parameters: &References a ULONG value.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network SupportChapter —4104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGetAssociationStatus()Gets the current connection, or association status.Syntax: UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value, a current connection status as follows:NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED Radio is associated w/access point.NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING Radio is scanning for network.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetWepStatus()Gets the current WEP status.Syntax: UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG status value which include the following:NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED WEP is currently enabled.NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED WEP is currently disabled.NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT WEP key is absent.NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTEDWEP is not supported.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetAuthenticationMode()Gets the current authentication mode.Syntax: UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value which include the following currentauthentication mode:NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN Open System is in use.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED Shared Key is in use.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO Automatic Detection.NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR Unknown value/Error.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.SetAuthenticationMode()Sets the radio authentication mode with a value defined in theGetAuthenticationMode() function.Syntax: UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );Parameters: Passes in a ULONG set to one of the values as defined inGetAuthenticationMode().Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network Support—Chapter 4105700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSetChannel()Sets the radio channel, ranging from 1 to 14.Syntax: UINT SetChannel( USHORT );Parameters: USHORT set to a desired channel (1-14).Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.EnableWep()Enables or disables WEP encryption.Syntax: UINT EnableWep( BOOL );Parameters: Set to TRUE (0) to enable WEP encryption or FALSE (1) to disabledWEP encryption.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.GetPowerMode()Gets the current power management mode of the radio.Syntax: UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG &);Parameters: &References a ULONG value which include the following current radiopower management mode:NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAMContinuous Access Mode (uses most power).NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_MAXMaximum Power Savings.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSPPower Saving Mode, best balance of power and performance.NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWNUnknown mode reported or error.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.SetSSID()Passes the desired SSID (network name).Syntax: UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );Parameters: Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID.Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful,ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, orERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed.

Network Support—Chapter 4109700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDetailsBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom.SAttach-Roam Cnt:This includes the number of new associations made during the currentsession, including any found roaming.SScanlist:This indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled. Seepage 97 for more information.SWatchdog Status:This monitors the activity of the Scan List: “Running” or “Stopped.”SSupplicant:This monitors the 802.1x security activity on the client: “Running” or“Stopped.”

Network SupportChapter —4110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWWAN Radio OptionsThe 700 Series Computer can integrate either the GSM/GPRS or theCDMA/1xRTT radio along with the 802.11b radio and the WirelessPrinting option. The WWAN radio option accommodates any WirelessWAN requirements, such as taking the 700 Series Computer off the prem-ises in a delivery vehicle to cover a much larger area.GSM/GPRSThe GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) and GPRS (Gen-eral Packet Radio Service) wireless infrastructure increases voice capacity,enables personalized “user-aware” services, and creates networking efficien-cies to help wireless service providers drive reduced operating costs.SGSM is an open, nonproprietary system. One of its great strengths isthe international roaming capability. This provides seamless and same-standardized same-number contactability world-wide. GSM satelliteroaming has extended service access to areas with unavailable terrestrialcoverage.SGPRS is the high-speed data evolution of GSM. GPRS supports Inter-net Protocol (IP), enabling access to Internet and intranet content andapplications from GPRS wireless devices. The anticipated data rate forGPRS is 115 Kbps and throughput rates of 30-60 Kbps have beenachieved initially. This high speed capability enables vehicle applicationsto become real-time and to use the Internet for access to corporate dataor information in the form of traffic or navigation.CDMA/1xRTT SB555Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of “spread-spectrum,” afamily of digital communication techniques used in military applicationsfor years. The core principle of spread-spectrum is the use of noise-likecarrier waves, and, as the name implies, bandwidths much wider than thatrequired for simple point-to-point communication at the same data rate.S1XRTT, the first phase of CDMA2000, is designed to support up to144 KB per second packet data transmission and to double the voicecapacity of current generation CDMA networks.SSB555 Embedded Module, from Sierra Wireless, provides completewireless functionality and integrates easily into the most compact andslender mobile applications with its small flexible design. The SB555offers maximum coverage and access to entire CDMA networks.

Network Support—Chapter 4111700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWAN Radio CORE ModuleThe WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about eitherthe GSM/GPRS radio or the CDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your700 Series Computer. The following illustrations are for a GSM/GPRSGEM350X radio.GeneralBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left.The information applies to both the GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT ra-dio modules unless otherwise indicated.SNetwork Type:This is the network type which would list either “GSM-GPRS” or“CDMA-1XRTT.” Scatternets are not supported.SIWS (GSM/GPRS) or Sprint PCS Network (CDMA/1xRTT):This lists the name of the wireless network provider, such as T-Mobile,Voicestream, AT&T Wireless, etc. “IWS” is short for the Iowa WirelessService carrier.SRegistered on home network:If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider net-work, then one of the following will appear:SRegistered on home network:The radio module is registered on its “home” network.SRegistered on roamed network:The radio module is registered on another service provider’ s network.SRadio Not Registered:There is no network within range of this radio module.SRadio ESN:This displays the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radiomodule or lists “Unavailable” if a number cannot be read from the ra-dio.

Network SupportChapter —4112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSRSSI:This displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency orlists “Unavailable” if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrievedfrom the radio module.SBER (GSM/GPRS GEM 350X, CDMA/1xRTT):This shows the Bit Error Rate (BER), the percentage of bits with errorsdivided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processedover a given period of time.Sf/w:This identifies the firmware version, if available.Sh/w:This identifies the hardware version, if available.SSerial Status:This indicates whether serial communications passed (“Serial com OK”)or failed (“Serial com FAIL”) in its last transaction. A status of “Serialcom FAIL” typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable toestablish communication with the radio module installed within.SXircom GEM3503 (GSM/GPRS),Siemens MC45 (GSM/GPRS),orSierra Wireless SB555 (CDMA/1xRTT):This identifies the product name for this radio module.SBand (GSM/GPRS) or Channel (CDMA/1xRTT):This identifies the bandwidth or channel available for this radio module,if any.SHistory:This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module’ s qualityof connections.SFriendly Indicator:Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filleddots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicatethat the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected.

Network Support—Chapter 4113700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDetailsBelow are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom. Most of this is simi-lar to what is shown under the General tab. The information applies to boththe GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT radio modules unless otherwise indi-cated.SSerial Status:This indicates whether serial communications passed (“PASS”) or failed(“FAIL”) in its last transaction. A status of “FAIL” typically indicatesthat the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communicationwith the radio module installed within.SManufacturer:This lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio mod-ule, such as “Xircom, an Intel Corporation,” “Siemens,” or “Sierra Wire-less.”SModel:This identifies the product name for this radio module, such as“SB555,” “GEM350X,” or “MC45.”SIMEI # (GSM/GPRS):This is the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) se-rial number of the GSM/GPRS radio module.SRSSI:This displays the RSSI frequency or lists “Unavailable” if there is no sig-nal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module.SOperator:This lists the name of the service providing the network support.SSIM Status (GSM/GPRS MC45):Identifies whether a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card is installedin this 700 Series Computer.

Network SupportChapter —4114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSBand (CDMA/1xRTT):This identifies the frequency bands used by this radio module.SIMSI # (GSM/GPRS):This shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) numberassigned to the SIM card installed in this 700 Series Computer.SRadio Temp (CDMA/1xRTT):This identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists “Unavail-able degrees” if there is no information or the temperature cannot bemeasured.SFirmware Rev:This identifies the firmware version, if available.SFirmware Date (GSM/GPRS):This provides the last date when this firmware was updated, if available.Terminal ApplicationTap Terminal App from the Details page to send standard AT commands.Information about these AT commands are available under “AT CommandInterface” on page 115.Select an AT command from the drop-down list, then tap Send. The re-sults of each test appears in the text box. Tap Exit or ok to close this screenand return to the Details page.

Network Support—Chapter 4115700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPhone ApplicationWith the WAN radio module installed in your 700 Series Computer, youcan send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of thecomputer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of thecomputer for your mouthpiece.Tap Phone App from the Details page to access the application which willprocess your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close this application andreturn to the Details page.STap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, thentap Send to initiate the call.STap Answer to receive an incoming call.STap End to disconnect a transaction.STap Vol ^ or Vol v to adjust the speaker volume.STap Mic ^ or Mic v to adjust the microphone sensitivity.AT Command InterfaceThis interface specification is based on the following recommendation:SETSI GSM 07.05:European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service.SETSI GSM 07.07:European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2)AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment.SITU-T Recommendation V.25 terSerial asynchronous automatic dialing and control.

Network SupportChapter —4116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNote: You will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDFdocument.Goto“http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html”to install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader according toAdobe’ s instructions.Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program theCDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface isavailable via the following URL. Click the “General AT command refer-ence” link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that thisURL is subject to change.http://www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.htmlCommand Set for Xircom/Intel GEM350XUse the GEM350X AT command list from Intel Corporation to programthe GPRS/GSM GEM350X radio module. The “GEM350X Programmer’ sReference” is available either from Intermec Technologies or from IntelCorporation. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Intel Cor-poration support personnel at the following URL for more information.Note that this URL is subject to change.http://support.intel.com/sites/support/index.htm?iid=intelhome1+support&Command Set for Siemens MC45Use the MC45 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program theGPRS/GSM MC45 radio module. The “MC45 Siemens Cellular EngineAT Command Set” is available either from Intermec Technologies or fromSiemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative or the SiemensAG support personnel at the following URL for more information. Notethat this URL is subject to change.http://www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/ap_btob_cda_presentation_frontdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html

Network Support—Chapter 4117700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTesting the AT CommandsThese commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-upnetworking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this con-nection and test these commands to your radio:1From the 700 Series Computer, select Start →Settings →theConnections tab →the Connections icon.2Tap Modify beneath the Internet Settings drop-down list.3Tap New.. to make a new connection.

Network SupportChapter —4118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual4Enter a name for the connection, select “WANA on COM4” from theSelect a modem drop-down list, and select “115200” from the Baudrate drop-down list. Tap Advanced to continue.5On the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually,then tap ok,Next, then Finish to return to the Internet Settings screenwith your new connection.

Network Support—Chapter 4119700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual6Press and hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tapConnect to initiate the connection. Wait for about ten seconds for theNetwork Log On screen, then tap OK.Note: You do not need to enter anyinformation within the Network Log On screen.7Use either the onscreen keyboard, or press the keys to type any of theAT commands provided by Sierra Wireless. Press or tap Enter to sendeach command. The results of each command sent will print onscreen -see the sample illustration below. Note that each “AT” command muststart with either the “at” or “at+” characters.STo see what you typed onscreen, type “ate1” to initiate the AT Echocommand, then press Enter.

Network SupportChapter —4120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualWireless PrintingThe 700 Series Computer can integrate the Wireless Printing option(which is equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communica-tions) along with either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio andthe 802.11b radio. This option uses the network to print informationstored on the 700 Series Computer.“Bluetooth” is the name given to a technology standard using short-rangeradio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixedelectronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a widerange of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user ef-fort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and lowcost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phonenetwork, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portablehand-held interfaces.DocumentationInformation about additional “Bluetooth” software, including the Blue-tooth Device Manager and the BTctrl program, can be found within theWireless Printing SDK. This is located on the 700C Software Tools CD,via the directory off the root of the toolkit called “Wireless Printing SDK.”It also can be found in the Wireless Printing Development Guide,alsoonthe700C Tools CD.Bluealps CORE ModuleThe Bluealps CORE module displays helpful information about this Wire-less Printing option within your 700 Series Computer. Below are descrip-tions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the Generaltab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left.

Network Support—Chapter 4121700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSBluetooth Point to Point:This is the network type. “Point to Point” is the type of connection sup-ported as of this publication. Scatternets are not supported. The only sup-ported application is wireless printing to Intermec wireless printers, suchas the 781T Belt-Mount Printer.SDevice Address:This provides the network address, which in this case, will be replacedby the device address of the Bluetooth compatible module within your700 Series Computer. Note that this address is universally unique.SDiscoverable:The following is displayed depending on whether the 700 Series Com-puter is configured to be discoverable:“Gen” Generally discoverable“Lim” Limited discovery“No” Not discoverableSConnectable:This defines whether the 700 Series Computer is able to accept otherdevices with Bluetooth compatible modules connecting to it. “Yes” if theconnection is doable, “No” if not.SBondable:This defines the security element of the 700 Series Computer, which isthe bondable setting. If the unit is bondable, then “Yes” is displayed,otherwise “No” is displayed.SModule Firmware:This reflects the firmware (hardware) version of the 700 Series Comput-er. When the CORE module first installs onto the unit, the firmwarelevel is unknown, thus “...reading” is displayed. Once the firmware levelis read from the unit, then a three-digit decimal is displayed.SStack [Stack Version] [loaded/not loaded]:[Stack Version] displays the Bluetooth stack version, which appears in the“1.2.3.4” format. If the stack is loaded, then “loaded” is displayed afterthe stack version, otherwise “not loaded” is displayed.SDevice Name:This displays the device name as assigned to the Bluetooth compatiblemodule by the end-user. If the configured name is longer than the spaceallowed, it will be truncated.SBTpak Version:This displays the driver version of additional Bluetooth componentswithin the 700 Series Computer and is usually presented in the “1.2.3”format. The version may also contain a letter at either end.SHistory:This bar graph displays an active history of this wireless printer driver’ squality of connections.SFriendly Indicator:If the Bluetooth stack is loaded, then all three dots are filled. These dotsare left empty if the stack is not loaded. These dots do vary based on theCORE application’ s perception of the overall connection quality.

$Network SupportChapter —4122 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAutoIP/DHCPAutomatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default in PocketPC 2002. To remain compatible with other Pocket PC devices, this settingneeds to be enabled. You can configure the registry settings in thefollowing to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:SFor Ethernet: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIpSFot 802.11b: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIpOther registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows.You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys inMicrosoft Help.SAutoIntervalSAutoMaskSAutoSubnetSAutoIPSAutoSeedWhen a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIPaddress from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check fora DHCP server every 300 seconds (5 minutes) and if a DHCP server isfound, the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from theDHCP server.In the MSDN Windows CE documentation, see “Automatic Client Config-uration” for more information on AutoIP.To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to “0.” If a DHCP servercannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the “Un-able to obtain a server assigned IP address” message.Note: If AutoIP is defined using CAB files, the EnableDHCP registry keymust also be defined and set to “1” before the system will attempt to ob-tain a DHCP address.To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get aDHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registrysettings.Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry moreoften to obtain a DHCP address.$

Network Support—Chapter 4123700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSNMP ConfigurationSimple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) was developed in the late1980s to provide a general-purpose internetworking management protocol.Its primary goal was to be simple so nothing would stand in the way of itsubiquitous deployment. To this end, it has been very successful as it is cur-rently deployed in almost every major internetworking product on themarket. However, like many achieved goals, the primary strength can alsobecome a weakness.The Focus was “Simple”An extreme example of simplicity versus power can be realized by compar-ing SNMP against the Common Management Information Protocol(CMIP), the ISO entry to the standard management protocol world.CMIP has a very rich set of primitives and a core set of data elements.However, to implement CMIP, a subset of the protocol must be selected.Then, to achieve interoperability, this subset must be agreed upon withother implementors. As SNMP was specified completely and with no op-tions, one implemented what was there and interoperability was assured.Returning to simplicity, SNMP was built simply for a number of reasonsother than time to market: robustness in the face of network failure, lowoverhead in the devices running the protocol; and ease of debugging theprotocol itself (the last thing you want to debug is the management protocolthat is supposed to be helping you debug your network). Thus, the SNMPlimited itself to the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). This gave theimplementor the ability and responsibility to manage lost packets andperform any necessary retransmissions. As network debugging in the faceof changing routes will certainly mean losing packets, retaining this controlfrom the transport service (layer 4) was considered essential. Since anetwork management protocol will run continuously, it is mandatory thatit consume as minimal a network resource as possible. UDP allows thenecessary control over packet transmissions, packet size and content(packetization). It is a natural choice.Using SNMPSNMP has three control primitives that initiate data flow from therequester (get, get-next, and set). There are two control primitives theresponder uses to reply. One is used in response to the requester’ s directquery (get-response) and the other is an asynchronous response to obtainthe requester’ s attention (trap). All five of these primitives are carried byUDP and are thus limited in size by the amount of data that can fit into asingle UDP packet. The relatively small message size was a goal of thedesign but for some reasonable set of network management functions, itimposes a limitation.Often in network management, it is necessary to obtain bulk informationwithout knowing at first what is in that bulk. In one case, there is a set ofproblems having to do with packets not going where they are supposed to,due to device misconfiguration that prevents proper protocol operationwhere one needs to view the entire set of data.

Network SupportChapter —4124 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRetrieval of Management InformationSNMP has the get-next primitive which permits the viewing of datawithout requiring prior knowledge. If you know what you are looking for,the get primitive will return it. When you want an entire table ofinformation, the get-next primitive will obtain it. However, unlessemployed with care, the get-next primitive can be extremelyresource-intensive in real time, network bandwidth, and the agent’ s CPUtime. The simplest use of the get-next primitive is to start at the beginningof a table, await the response and then issue another get-next with thename returned. As an example, say you wanted the next-hop address,next-hop interface, and route-type from a routing table containing 1000entries. Using the simplest form of get-next, this would require 2x3x1000or 6000 packets (get-next and get-response packets, columns, and rows).Astraight-forward optimization would be to request the three columns in asingle packet. This puts the number of packets at 2x1000 or 2000 packets.In real time, it is the product of the round trip by the number of request.In agent CPU time, this is still 6000 lookups in the routing table for bothcases.An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a TimeThe ability to retrieve only one piece or object at a time has been aproblem for SNMP. This is particularly an issue with the use of thisprotocol in wireless environments where the wireless datapipe is small andoverhead due to network management it is considered overhead. Oneapproach creates multiple get-next requests running concurrently. A secondalgorithm, reduces the packet count by combining the multiple concurrentget-nexts into a single packet. Neither approach has been implementedwhich makes network management in wireless environment, thoughessential to the success of the operation, tenuous. The issue has beenresolved in SNMP V2 protocol where a get-bulk primitive has beendefined.ConclusionSoftware development moves forward by evolving the unknown into theknown and wireless environments are moving from vertical onlyapplication to wide spread implementation. At the time of the SNMPinception, it was not possible to conceive of a reliable transport basednetwork management protocol. Today’ s problems require moresophisticated data to analyze a problem. This puts the burden back on theprotocol to send and receive data quickly and efficiently. Work continuesin subcommittees to improve SNMP and resolve the issues that aredeveloping with new applications and new network architectures.

Network Support—Chapter 4125700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSNMP Configuration on the 700 Series ComputerIn short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the ex-change of management information between network devices. The 700Series Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to controland configure the 700 Series Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enablednetwork.The 700 Series Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor-mation Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP supportfor MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) ObjectIdentifiers (OIDs).Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage-ment station, these are not available in the Unit Manager applications.Management Information BaseThe Management Information Base is a database that contains informationabout the elements to be managed. The information identifies the manage-ment element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, Read-Write). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) - a ma-chine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managedare represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects.You will find the following MIB files either on the 700C Tools CD or onthe web via http://www.intermec.com:SINTERMEC.MIBDefines the root of the Intermec MIB tree.SITCADC.MIBDefines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as bar codesymbologies.SITCSNMP.MIBDefines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods,such as an SNMP security IP address.SITCTERMINAL.MIBDefines objects for 700 Series parameters, such as key clicks.

Network SupportChapter —4126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualObject IdentifiersEach object has a unique identifier called an OID. OIDs consist of a se-quence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored ina tree structure. OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object inthe tree. Seven MIB OIDs are shown in the followig table.ExampleThe internet OID = 1.3.6.1.MIB Object IdentifiersMIB-II Item OID Group or Table DescriptionifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 Interfaces Group Indicates the number of adapterspresent in the system. For the 700Series Computer, if one adapter ispresent in the system, then ifNum-ber =1andifIndex=1.ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex Interfac es Tab le (ifTab le) A unique value for each interface.The value ranges between 1 and thevalue of ifNumber.ifDescr 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing informa-tion about the interface.ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex In ter faces Table (ifTable) An integer containing informationabout the type of the interface. It isequal to 1 for Other.ipAdEntAddr 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)The IP address to which this entry’ saddressing information pertains(same as 700 IP address), where IPAddress is the valid non-zero IP ad-dress of the 700 Series Computer.ipAdEntIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)The index value that uniquely iden-tifies the interface to which thisentry is applicable (same as ifIndex).ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress IP address Table(ipAddrTable)The subnet mask associated withthe IP address of this entry (same asSubnet Mask).Configuring with SNMPThe community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 SeriesComputer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only communi-ty string is “public” and “private” is the default read/write communitystring. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. To config-ure the 700 Series Computers using SNMP:1Configure 700 Series Computers for RF or Ethernet communications.2Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be chan-ged. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.3Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that aredefined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, orsecurity configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, “ControlPanel Applets,” to learn more about these parameters.

127700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrinter Support5The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printersfrom Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec Representative for in-formation about these printers.S6820A full-page, 80-column printer.S6808A 4-inch belt-mount printer.S781TA 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module fromSocket Communications.S782TA 2-inch workboard printer.

Printer SupportChapter —5128 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrinting ASCIIThe following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol-lows:SAdd port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port.SUse LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developer’ s Kit(SDK) - see the SDK User’ s Manual for more information.SVia wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on the700C Software Tools CD for more information.Directly to a PortPrinting directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format ofthis data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities.You must understand the printer commands available for your specificprinter. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer.Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly tothe port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allowsyou to do line printing (print one line at a time) rather than the page for-mat printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since datadoes not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (dis-play to printer). Most Intermecprinters use Epson Escape Sequences tocontrol print format operations.These commands are available in documentation you receive with yourprinters or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print di-rectly to the port.Directly to a Generic Serial PortTo print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):SUse CreateFile() to open ports - COM1: can be opened on most de-vices.SUse WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer.SUse CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port.IrDA Printer DriverIrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di-rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro-soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805,6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported.

$Printer Support—Chapter 5129700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Printer DriverThe NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is aStream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supportsonly NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers overa selected serial port.All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic op-erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32APIs.Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, andget printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl()functions.About NPCPNPCP (NorandPortable Communications Protocol) is a proprietary pro-tocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermecmobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printersand data communications.NPCP Driver Installation and RemovalUse LPT9: for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parameter.COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Series Computer.Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver.DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory spacewhen the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned byRegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice().Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify thefull path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice()function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is aDWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream driverto use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out duringthe call. The first parameter “LPT” (Device Name) and the secondparameter “9’ (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such asLPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call.Install(){HANDLE hDevice;TCHAR port[6];port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);port[5] = TCHAR(0);hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”LPT”), 9,TEXT(“\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll”), (DWORD)port);}$

Printer SupportChapter —5130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOpening the NPCP DriverThe application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile()function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter“LPT9:” must reflect the device name and index used in theRegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:hFile = CreateFile(_T(”LPT9:”), GENERIC_WRITE |GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL,NULL);SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use.SThe NPCP device is already open.SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified.Closing the NPCP DriverUsing the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. WherehFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.STRUE = the device is successfully closed.SFALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de-vice.Reading from the NPCP DriverReading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from theprinter are the result of commands sent to the printer. DeviceIoControl()functions are provided where data is to be received from the printer.Writing to the NPCP DriverAll Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function.The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printercommands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP errormay be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description onthe next page.

Printer Support—Chapter 5131700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Driver I/O ControlsAn application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printeroperation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind andclose communication sessions with the printer, and must be completedbefore any other commands to the driver can execute properly.The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completedits specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. Thefollowing I/O control codes are defined:#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCELCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_BINDCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSECTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERRORCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSHCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTLCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVERCTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)SIOCTL_NPCP_CANCELThis cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers andreinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_BINDThis command is required before any data is sent or received by theprinter. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the com-munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re-ceived by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the applicationmay use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended errorcode. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_CLOSEThis command closes the current session with the printer. This functionalways returns TRUE. No parameters are required.SIOCTL_NPCP_ERRORThis command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format.The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in thelow byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that re-turned an error was not received correctly by the printer theFRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operationalways returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required.See “NPCP Error Codes” on page 133.SIOCTL_NPCP_FLUSHThis command allows the application to poll the printer for errors whilethe report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error oc-curs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE and theapplication can get the extended error code by usingIOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required.

$Printer SupportChapter —5132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Printer CommunicationsAll NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:1Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.2Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc-cess; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding printjobs.3Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff-er resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’ s status. Ifan error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERRORto get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure.4Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors andthat all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex-tended error. If the error is critical in nature, useIOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the commu-nications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensureproper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry theoperation.5After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues toprint the report properly by polling the printer’ s status. UseIOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer’ s status. If an error is re-ported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the er-ror and determine the correct recovery procedure.Sample CodeSee sample code in the “\700 Color Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\PortDrivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\” directory for more details on printing, printercommunications and error code handling.$

Printer Support—Chapter 5133700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualNPCP Error CodesCall the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/Ncompatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the datareturned.// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and need tobe resent.

$Printer SupportChapter —5134 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualO’Neil Printer DriverThe DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Drivernamed ONEIL.DLL.All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basicoperations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(),WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs.The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806,6808, 681T, and 781 printers over a selected serial port.DTR Driver Installation and RemovalYour application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe-vice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend thatyou use “DTR” for the Device Name parameter, “1” for the Device Driverindex parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last parame-ter:SNULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600S“COM1” only COM port specified defaults to 9600S“COM1:9600” sets to COM port and specified bit rateS“COM1:19200” sets to COM port and specified bit rateUse the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter toDeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function callis demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall thedriver.Install(){HANDLE hDevice;TCHAR port[6];port[0] = TCHAR(‘C’);port[1] = TCHAR(‘O’);port[2] = TCHAR(‘M’);port[3] = TCHAR(‘1’);port[4] = TCHAR(‘:’);port[5] = TCHAR(0);hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(”DTR”), 1, TEXT(”\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL”),(DWORD)port);}$

Printer Support—Chapter 5135700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualOpening the DTR DriverThe application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function.The call can be implemented as follows:hFile = CreateFile(_T(”DTR1:”), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL,OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);The first parameter “DTR1:” must reflect the device name and index usedin the RegisterDevice() function call.The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:SThe port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currentlyin use.SThe DTR device is already open.SThe share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared.SAccess permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE.Closing the DTR DriverUsing the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. WherehFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call.STRUE indicates the device is successfully closed.SFALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an alreadyclosed device.Writing to the DTR DriverYou can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer.The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printercommands.DTR Printer CommunicationsAll DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:1Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver.2Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors andthat all data were written.3Use CloseHandle() to close the driver.

Printer SupportChapter —5136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual

137700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner Support6The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laserscanning technologies, including the following:SAPS linear imager:Reads 1D symbologies and PDF 417 bar codes. Linear imaging usingVista Scanning technology reads low-contrast bar codes, laminated barcodes, and bar codes displayed on CRT or TRT displays. This imaginguses harmless LEDs for illumination and does not require any warninglabels. Vista Scanning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completelysolid state with no moving parts or oscillating mirrors.S2D Imager:This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies, including PDF417 and Data Matrix without “painting.” It can also read 1D codesfrom any orientation, for example the scan beam does not need to bealigned perpendicular to the symbol in order to read it. Photography is asecondary application; the lens in the device will favor bar code reading.Photos are 640x480, 256 gray-scale.S1D laser scanner:Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes.SPDF 417 laser scanner:Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF 417 labels by “painting”the label.

Scanner SupportChapter —6138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualScanner Control and Data TransferNote: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection func-tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu.See Chapter 3, “Installing Applications” for more information.The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu-late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem anduser applications:SAutomatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data,and configure and control the bar code reader engine.SITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code datafrom the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio andvisual notification when data arrives. For more information, see theSDK User’ s Manual.SITCAxReaderCommand functions:Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor-mation using the reader interface commands. For more information, seethe SDK User’ s Manual.SScanning EasySet bar code labels:You can use the EasySet bar code creation software from IntermecTechnologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labelsto change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings.Automatic Data Collection COM InterfacesData collection configuration and functionality cannot be accessed by anymeans (including control panel applets or remote management applications)until after the 700 Series Computer has completed initialization, whichoccurs during a warm- or cold-boot or after a firmware upgrade.When initialization is complete, the green LED on the 700 Series Com-puter stops flashing. Changes made to configuration settings remain after awarm boot. After a cold-boot, all configuration settings are reset to theirdefaults with the exception of scanner configurations, which remain exceptfor the Symbology Identifier transmission option or the Preamble andPostamble strings. To reset all configuration settings to the factory defaults,the S9C scanner firmware must be reloaded.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter139700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe Automatic Data Collection (ADC) functions are accessed throughcustom COM interfaces. These interfaces allow the application to receivebar code data and configure and control the bar code reader engine. TheCOM interfaces include the following functions:SIADC (starting on page 151)SIBarCodeReaderControl (starting on page 159)SIS9CConfig (starting on page 172)SIS9CConfig2 (starting on page 204)SIS9CConfig3 (starting on page 216)SIImage Interface (starting on page 221)Multiple ADC COM Object SupportA 700 Series Computer may have multiple reader engines to decode differ-ent types of ADC data. For example, a bar code reader engine decodes rawbar code data and passes it to a bar code reader COM object. An RFIDreader engine decodes raw RFID tag data and passes it to an RFID tagreader COM object.ADC COM interfaces are implemented as in-process COM objects. Aninstance of the ADC COM object creates a logical connection to access orcontrol the reader engine. Specifically, the IBarCodeReadConfig or IBar-CodeReaderControl COM objects can manage the bar code scanner con-figuration while the ADC COM object can gather data simultaneously.These ADC COM objects or connections can be created in a single ap-plication or multiple applications. Up to seven instances of a COM objectcan be created for a reader engine. For more information, see “How toCreate and Use the ADC COM Interfaces”below.For data collection features, ADC COM objects also provide for readahead and non-read ahead data access and grid data editing.

Scanner SupportChapter —6140 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualHow to Create and Use the ADC COM InterfacesYou can also use the Input Device Functions (starting on page 149) tocreate and use the ADC COM interfaces.1Create and initialize the in-process Bar Code Reader object usingITCDeviceOpen() (see page 149). This function returns a COMInterface pointer to the Bar Code Reader Object created by thefunction.2Set the data grid if data filtering is desired (default grid gives the applica-tion all the data). Below is a sample code of how to set the grid to acceptCode 39 data that starts with the letter “A” and is not a reader com-mand.ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID stBCGrid;stBCGrid.stDIGrid.szDataMask = TEXT(”A%s”);stBCGrid.stDDGrid.dwSymbologyMask = BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_CODE39;stBCGrid.dwDataSourceTypeMask = ITC_DATASOURCE_USERINPUT;HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->SetAttribute(ITC_RDRATTR_GRID,reinterpret_cast<BYTE *>(&stBCGrid),sizeof(stBCGrid));3Issue a read to accept the bar code data. The timestamp, symbology, anddata type are put into the ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS struc-ture. Passing in a pointer to this structure is optional. The followingsample code uses an infinite timeout.ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;BYTE rgbBCData[1024]; // Buffer used to accept the bar code dataDWORD dwBytesReceived; // Number of bytes in the return data.HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(rgbBCData,sizeof(rgbBCData),&dwBytesReceived,& stBCDetails,INFINITE);4Compile and link the application.Read-Ahead Bar Code Data AccessThe Bar Code Reader COM object delivers ADC data to the connectionin read-ahead mode. In this mode, the data is queued until a COM con-nection is ready to read it. Read-ahead mode decouples reader device per-formance from the application performance. That is, data is read as fast asthe user can scan it, independent of the connection processing load. Nodata will be scanned until the first Read() function is posted.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter141700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGrid Data FilteringThe virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC)data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer canreceive and interpret the data as keypad input. The data can be filtered sothat only data conforming to a certain text pattern or symbology will besent to an application. After the data is filtered, it can be edited by adding,deleting, or rearranging portions of the text or by extracting portions oftext for further editing. To filter and edit data, you need to define thevirtual wedge grid parameters.SGrid Processing:Grid processing takes place in two steps:SCompilation:In which the user’ s grid expressions are checked for errors andreduced to a binary form for faster matching. This is done wheneverthe virtual wedge grid is set or changed by configuration software.SMatching:In which data is tested against the grids set in compilation. Matchingcan be performed multiple times after a compilation. The AIMsymbology ID of the data being tested, including the enclosing anglebrackets, must be prepended to the incoming data.SyntaxThe basic syntax of each grid expression is:<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expressionwhere:SsymIDIs the AIM symbology ID (see the AIM Symbology ID Defaults tablestarting on page 219).SfilterexpressionIs any character string that includes valid filter expression values (seethe “Filter Expression Values” table on the next page).Sediting-expressionIs any character string that includes valid editing expression values (seethe “Editing Expression Values” table on page 144).

$Scanner SupportChapter —6142 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFilter Expression ValuesA filter-expression can be any string of text containing the operators listedbelow.Filter Expression ValuesOperator Meaning ExampleAny character string not containingthespecialcharacters:.?[]{}or\(period, question mark, left/rightbrackets, left/right curly brackets, back-slash).Match the string literally. super20 matches super20\c where c is any of the special char-acters:.?[]{}or\(period, question mark, left/rightbrackets, left/right curly brackets, back-slash)Remove any special meaning of c. \* matches *.(period) Any character. . matches x^ (tarot) Anchor the match at the beginningof the string.^abc matches abc, but not aabc$ (dollar sign) Anchor the match at the end of thestring.abc$ matches abc but not abcc? (question mark) Repeat the preceding expression zeroor one time.aa? matches a or aa*(asterisk) Repeat the preceding expression zeroor more times.ab*c matches ac, abc, abbc, etc.+(plussymbol) Repeat the preceding expression oneor more times.ab+c matches abc, abbc, etc.[characterclass] A series of nonrepeating charactersdenoting a class.[abcdefhijklmnopqrstuvwxyz] is theclass of all lowercase alphas.[rangel`rangeh] A sequential range of nonrepeatingcharacters denoting a class.[a-z]istheclassofalllowercaseal-phas.[^characterclass] Any character except those denotedby a character class.[^a-z] matches a numeric digit or apunctuation mark.[characterclass_tag] [:alnum:] - Alphanumeric characters[:alpha:] - Alphabetic characters[:blank:] - Tab and space[:cntrl:] - Control characters[:digit:] - Numeric characters[:graph:] - All printable characters ex-cept space[:lower:] - Lowercase letters[:print:] - All printable characters[:punct:] - Punctuation[:space:] - White space characters[:upper:] - Uppercase letters[:xdigit:] - Hexadecimal digits[[:alpha:]]* matches Dynaction,Selmer, or NewWonder but not Su-per20{num} Matches exactly num repetitions. a{3} matches only aaa{min,} Matches at least num repetitions. a{3,} matches aaaa but not aa$

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter143700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFilter Expression Values (continued)ExampleMeaningOperator{min,max} A repetition operator like + or *, ex-cept the number of repetitions is spe-cified by min and max.[a-z]{1,3} matches a, ab, or aab, butnot aabc(expr1)|(expr2) Matches expr1 or expr2.a|b matches a or b(subexpression) Grouping operator to consolidateterms into a subexpression, whichcan override the order of evaluation.The subexpression is available for lat-er matching or editing by means of\index,where\index is between 1-9and refers to the index-th group inthe string, counting from left toright. \0 refers to the whole expres-sion.Overriding evaluation order: (ab)*cmatches c, abc, ababc, etc.Back-referencing: (aa)bb\1 matchesaabbaa.$

$Scanner SupportChapter —6144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEditing Expression ValuesThis table lists the valid operators for editing expressions.Operator Meaning Example\index The index-th subexpression (reading left-right)in the matched string. index must be between0`9. \0 is the matched expression itself.M([0-9]{6})= > \1 produces 270494 whenM270494 is scanned, stripping off the firstcharacter.&or\0 The matched expression itself. M[0-9]{6}= > \0-Conn andM[0-9]{6}= > &-Connboth produceM270494-Connwhen M270494 is scanned.\xhh A concise representation of the lower 256characters in the Unicode set. When con-verted, this is still a 16-bit value.\x0d inserts a carriage return.any character string Inserts any character string in the outputstring.See previous examples.S<symID> is optional. If present, only data in the indicated symbology isaccepted.SIf the entire expression is blank, all data is passed unchanged. If =>editing-expression is omitted, then all data that passes through the filter isreturned unchanged. If = > editing expression is present, the data is trans-formed by editing-expression.SMultiple grid expressions can be compiled and are related in a logicalOR fashion. These are expressed as single grid expressions separated bysemicolons. When matching is attempted, the first grid expression fromleft to right that achieves a match will cause the data to be accepted.SAll pattern expressions and parsed data are in Unicode.Grid Filter Example 1This accepts a serial number in which the encoded number is a six-charac-ter string beginning with M followed by six numeric characters.SFilterM[0-9]{6}SEffectWhen a bar code, such as M270494, is scanned, all data is passed.Grid Filter Example 2This formats a scanned Social Security number and forms it into an XMLelement tagged “SSN”.SFilter([0-9]{3})([0-9]{2})([0-9]{4})= > <SSN > \1-\2-\3</SSN >SEffectA bar code, such as 123456789, is passed and reformatted to<SSN > 123-45-6789</SSN >$

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter145700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGrid Filter Example 3This deletes the first three and last five characters of a 21-character Code128 label and deletes the first two characters of a 10-character Interleaved2 of 5 label.SFilter<]C > ...(.{13}).....= > \1; <]I > ..(........)= > \1SEffectIf Code 128, AAA1234567890123BBBBB becomes 1234567890123If Interleaved 2 of 5, AA12345678 becomes 12345678Grid Filter Example 4This inverts data such that the first alphabetic string (like a first name) andsecond alphabetic string (like a last name) are reversed and separated by acomma and a space.SFilter([[:alpha:]])+ ([[:alpha:]])+= > \2, \1SEffectWhen a bar code with the data “Dexter Gordon” is scanned, the data ismodified to read “Gordon, Dexter”.ADC ConnectionA 700 Series Computer can have both Bar Code and RFID reader engineswith each engine supporting multiple connections. Each connection allowsan application to access data or manage a configuration. An applicationcould have multiple connections.// Get an instance of the ADC COM object that corresponds integrated scannerIBarCodeReaderControl *pIBCControl;// Pointer to the Bar Code Reader objectHRESULT hrStatus = ITCDeviceOpen( TEXT(”default”),IID_IBarCodeReaderControl, ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,(LPVOID *) &pIBCControl);// If the ADC object was successfully created and initialized, accept barcode data.ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;stBCDetails.wStructSize = sizeof(stBCDetails);BYTE rgbBCData[1024];//Buffer used to accept the bar code dataDWORD dwBytesReceived;// Number of bytes in the return data.HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(rgbBCData,sizeof(rgbBCData),&dwBytesReceived,& stBCDetails,INFINITE);$

Scanner SupportChapter —6146 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual2D Imager OverviewThe 700 Color optional integrated 2D Imager captures 640x480256-grayscale images at 20 frames per second. The imager features can becategorized into data collection features and image acquisition features asfollows:Data Collection FeaturesThe imager includes a decode engine capable of decoding 2D matrixsymbologies such as Data Matrix as well as the traditional 1D and stackedsymbologies (see the table on the next page for supported symbologies). Theapplication programming interfaces used to collect bar code data and con-figure the imager are the same as those used for the laser scanner. This in-cludes the keyboard wedge as well as the ADC COM interfaces and in-cludes functionality such as data editing and data filtering. In addition, theimager has the following configuration features (see “IS9CConfig3 Func-tions” starting on page 216 for configuration details):SAimer LED:A small, rectangular-aiming LED is displayed periodically during theimage capture and decoding process. The initial duration (after scan but-tons are pressed) of the aimer LED can be configured. This helps to selectthe specific bar code to be scanned with multiple bar codes in theimage.SScaled Illumination LED:When the ambient light is not sufficient to decode the bar code, the redillumination LEDs will be turned on to brighten the image. The inten-sity of the illumination LEDs is scaled to brighten the image justenough for decode. The reduces power consumption and the effect ofspecular reflection.SWindow size and position:The default window size (640x480) can be reduced in size and posi-tioned. This is useful in applications where multiple bar codes may bepresent in the image and the specific bar code must be selected to beread. For example, the window can be sized and positioned around theaimer LED. The entire bar code must reside in the configured windowfor a good decode.Omni-directional scanning is a feature that does not require configuration.1D and stacked symbologies as well as 2D matrix symbologies can bescanned with the 700 Series Computer in any orientation. Thus, time isnot needed to orient the 700 horizontal as with laser scanners.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter147700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-ther by an imager or by a laser scanner.Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser ScannerCode 39 XXInterleaved 2 of 5 X XStandard 2 of 5 XXMatrix 2 of 5 XCode 128 XXCode 93 X XCodabar XXMSI XPlessey XUPC X XEAN/EAN 128 XXCode 11 XPDF 417 XXMicro PDF 417 XTelepen XData Matrix XQR Code XImage Acquisition FeaturesThe integrated imager provides the following image acquisition features:SReal-time and Still Image Acquisition:This includes functions that start and stop image acquisition and readacquired images.SSignature Capture:This allows the application to retrieve an image of the normalized signa-ture. This means the image is always oriented as if the picture were tak-en at right angles to the signature, at the same distance, and in the cen-ter of the image no matter in what orientation the picture was taken.Signature capture requires a PDF 417 or Code 128 bar code symbologyto be present in the image and requires the application to identify theX,Y offsets relative to the center the bar code, the X,Y dimension ofimage to be captured, and the aspect ratio of the bar code. Note theunits are in terms of the narrow element width of the bar code.

Scanner SupportChapter —6148 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSee the following example signature capture label and dimensions. Theseimage acquisition features are provided through the IImage Interfacedefined on page 221.Y-axis–Y–XIntelligent bar codeunitsBar code height

6 Scanner Support—Chapter149700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreate and Delete ADC COM Object FunctionsUse these functions to create and release ADC COM interfaces.ITCDEVMGMT.H is the header file and ITCDEVMGMT.LIB is thelibrary.ITCDeviceOpenThis function opens and initializes a communication channel to the de-vice. In C++, this function returns a pointer to an interface on which themethods are called. In C, this function returns a handle, which is the firstparameter in each of the interface function calls.SyntaxHRESULT ITCDeviceOpen( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName, REFIID iid,ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags, void** ppvObject );ParameterspszDevice [in] Pointer to a string that contains the device nameon which to initialize the logical connection.The device name (Merlin 1) identifies acommunications port.Use “default” for all internal scanners, such asImager, SE900, etc. Use “ExtScanner” fortethered scanners.iid [in] The identifier of the interface being requested.eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the readcharacteristics as follows:SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEADData is buffered on behalf of the callingapplications. Data Buffering starts after thefirst call to IADC::Read ().SITC_DHDEVFLAG_NODATAThe client application is managing the deviceto set its configuration or control its interfacebut not to collect data from the device.ppvObject [out] A pointer to the interface pointer identified byiid. If the object does not support this interface,ppvObject is set to NULL.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSITCDeviceClose

Scanner SupportChapter —6150 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualITCDeviceCloseThis function closes the interface opened with ITCDeviceOpen.Syntax:HRESULT ITCDeviceClose( IUnknown** ppvObject );ParametersppvObject [in,out] A pointer to the interface pointer created byITCDeviceOpen. If successful on output, thispointer is set to NULL.Return ValuesNone.RemarksOn Windows, this interface decrements the reference count. So alterna-tively, IUnknown::Release() could be used and must be used if referencecounting is performed with IUnknown::AddRef(). On DOS, this functioncloses all resources associated with the channel.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter151700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC FunctionsIADC functions provide ADC data in an input device independent man-ner. This interface can receive bar code data, RFID data, and other ADCdata from data collection engines, such as a bar code scanner. Use IADCfunctions if bar code specifics such as symbology are not important to theapplication.IADC functions are the following. IADC.H is the header file andITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used toobtain the interface.SIADC::CancelReadRequest (page 152)SIADC::Initialize (page 153)SIADC::QueryAttribute (page 154)SIADC::QueryData (page 155)SIADC::Read (page 156)SIADC::SetAttribute (page 157)

Scanner SupportChapter —6152 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::CancelReadRequestThis function cancels a pending Read() request. This call can be made on aseparate thread as a Read() or on the same thread. On a separate thread,the function is useful in unblocking a blocked Read() so that other opera-tions can be performed. On the same thread, this function is useful instopping data from being collected on behalf of a Read Ahead Client.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::CancelReadRequest( BOOL FlushBufferedData,WORD*pwTotalDiscardedMessages, DWORD *pdwTotalDiscardedBytes );ParametersFlushBufferedData [in] True Flush and discard all alreadybuffered data.False Do not discard data, data will bereturned on the next read call.pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out] Total number of discarded bufferedlabels or tags.pdwTotalDiscardedBytes Total number of discarded bytes.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksThe return value indicates whether a read was pending.See AlsoSIADC::InitializeSIADC::QueryAttributeSIADC::QueryDataSIADC::ReadSIADC::SetAttribute

6 Scanner Support—Chapter153700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::InitializeThis function initializes a connection by opening a communications chan-nel with a logical reader engine. The communications port is implicitlyidentified. This communication channel is required to collect data or con-figure the device.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::Initialize ( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName,ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags );ParameterspszDeviceName [in] Pointer to a string that contains the device nameon which to initialize the logical connection.The device name (Merlin 1) identifies acommunications port.Use “default” for all internal scanners, such asImager, SE900, etc. Use “ExtScanner” fortethered scanners.eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the readcharacteristic as follows:SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEADData is buffered on behalf of the callingapplication. Data buffering starts after thefirst call to IADC::Read ().Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIADC::CancelReadRequestSIADC::QueryAttributeSIADC::QueryDataSIADC::ReadSIADC::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6154 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::QueryAttributeThis function retrieves a specified attribute that is device-independent.The specified attribute can be a grid or multiclient enable status.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::QueryAttribute (ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID, BYTE rgbBuffer[], DWORDdwBufferSize, DWORD *pnBufferData );ParameterseAttribID [in] Specifies the attribute. Only one attribute can bequeried at a time. See IADC::SetAttribute.rgbBuffer [out] Contains buffer for the attribute to be queried.The structure of lpBuffer depends on theattribute being queried. See IADC::SetAttributefor a description of these structures.dwBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes rgbBuffer canstore.pnBufferData [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to put thenumber of bytes stored in rgbBuffer.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIADC::CancelReadRequestSIADC::InitializeSIADC::QueryDataSIADC::ReadSIADC::SetAttribute

6 Scanner Support—Chapter155700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::QueryDataThis function returns the status of user input data that has been buffered.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::QueryData ( DWORD *dwTotalBufferedBytes, WORD*wNumberOfMessages, DWORD *dwNextMessageSize );ParametersdwTotalBufferedBytes [out] Total bytes buffered for connection.wNumberOfMessages [out] Total messages buffered. For example,each buffer contains a single bar code scan.dwNextMessageSize [out] Size (in bytes) of the next bufferedmessage.Return ValuesA standard status code that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIADC::CancelReadRequestSIADC::InitializeSIADC::QueryAttributeSIADC::ReadSIADC::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6156 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::ReadThis function requests user input data from the reader engine. This is ablocking function that returns either when there is data or after a timeout.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::Read ( BYTE rgbDataBuffer[], DWORDdwDataBufferSize, DWORD pnBytesReturned, SYSTEMTIMEpSystemTime, DWORD dwTimeout );ParametersrgbDataBuffer [in] Pointer to the buffer that receives the datafrom the device.dwDataBufferSize [in] Maximum number of bytes that can bestored in rgbDataBuffer.pnBytesReturned [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to storethe number of bytes returned inrgbDataBuffer.pSystemTime [out] Pointer to a SYSTEMTIME structure thatwill hold the time stamp of the receiveddata. This can be NULL if a timestamp isnot needed.dwTimeout [in] Number of milliseconds caller waits fordata. This parameter is ignored if theRead Ahead flag is not set.S0If data is not available, returns quickly.SINFINITEWaits until data is available.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIADC::CancelReadRequestSIADC::InitializeSIADC::QueryAttributeSIADC::QueryDataSIADC::SetAttribute

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter157700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIADC::SetAttributeThis function changes an attribute such as a grid specification.SyntaxHRESULT IADC::SetAttribute ( ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID,BYTE rgbData[], DWORD nBufferSize );ParameterseAttribID [in] Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attributecan be set at a time. The attribute is:SITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLEIndicates whether this client can coexist withother clients.rgbData [in] Contains data for the attribute to be set.Depending on the eAttribID, this will be mappedto the appropriate structure as follows:SITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLEBOOL is the rgbData Data Structure.STRUE, Client can receive data with otherclients (default).SFALSE, Data stream to this client is turnedoff when there are other clients.SITC_DHATTR_READFILTERITC_READFILTER is the rgbData DataStructure. The ITC_READFILE structure isdefined in IADCDEVICE.H as follows:typedef struct{#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240WORD nFilterChars;TCHAR szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];} ITC_READFILTER;where:SITC_MAXFILTER_CHARSMaximum number of characters in a filterspecification. Includes NULL termination.SnFilterChars Number of characters inpszDataMask.SszFilter Data mask specification. See“Grid Data Filtering.”nBufferSize [in] Number of bytes in rgbData.ITC_DHATTR_READFILTERRegular expression that performs data filtering and data editing. See “GridData Filtering” on page 141 for more information.Return ValuesA standard status code that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.$

Scanner SupportChapter —6158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSee AlsoSIADC::CancelReadRequestSIADC::InitializeSIADC::QueryAttributeSIADC::QueryDataSIADC::Read

6 Scanner Support—Chapter159700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl FunctionsIBarCodeReaderControl functions provide functionality for bar codecollection and control only. These functions allow an application to:STrigger the bar code laser scannerSDisable the scannerSReceive a bar code with details such as symbology scanned, data type(Unicode, ASCII), and the time the data was received.These functions include the following. IBARCODEREADER.H is theheader file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUIDvalue used to obtain the interface.SIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest (page 160)SIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED (page 161)SIBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize (page 162)SIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep (page 163)SIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (page 164)SIBarCodeReaderControl::Read (page 165)SIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (page 167)SIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner (page 171)

Scanner SupportChapter —6160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestThis function cancels a pending IBarCodeReaderControl::Read request. Ifthe read request is blocked, issue the CancelReadRequest from a separatethread.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest( BOOLFlushBufferedData, WORD *pwTotalDiscardedMessages,WORD*pwTotalDiscardedBytes );ParametersFlushBufferedData [in] TRUE Flushes and discards all buffereddata.FALSE Does not discard data; data willbe returned on the next readcall.pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out] Total number of discardedbuffered labels or tags.pwTotalDiscardedBytes Total number of discardedbytes.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter161700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDThis function controls LED illumination on a tethered scanner. The goodread LED and any valid LEDs will be turned on and off based on definedparameters.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED(ITC_BARCODE_LASER_LED_ID eLED, BOOL fLedOn );ParameterseLED [in] The specified LED identifier.SITC_BARCODE_LASER_GOOD_READ_LEDIdentifies the good read LED.fLedOn [in] TRUE turns on the LED. FALSE turns off the LED.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksThis function does not coordinate LED control with the scanner. If thescanner LED control is enabled, function results will be unpredictable.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

Scanner SupportChapter —6162 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeThis function opens and initializes a communications channel with a log-ical bar code reader engine.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize ( LPCTSTRpszDeviceName, ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags );ParameterspszDeviceName [in] Pointer to a string with device on which toinitialize the logical connection. The deviceidentifies a communications port. Use “default”for all internal scanners, such as Imager, SE900,etc. Use “ExtScanner” for tethered scanners.eDeviceFlags [in] Enumeration that identifies the readcharacteristic as follows:SITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEADData is buffered on behalf of the callingapplications. Data Buffering starts after thefirst call to IADC::Read ().Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter163700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepThis function causes the reader engine to generate a high beep, a low beep,or a custom beep. The high beep and low beep are preconfigured beeptones and durations. The custom beep allows the client to specify the fre-quency and duration. The volume is the current volume setting. Note thisis not implemented.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep( ITC_BEEP_SPECrgBeepRequests[], DWORD dwNumberOfBeeps );ParametersrgBeepRequests [in] Array of ITC_BEEP_SPEC structures thatidentifies the beep type. The beep structureis:typedef struct tagITCBeepSpec{ITC_BEEP_TYPE eBeepType; // Identifies the type of beep// Following fields used only if the beep type is ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP.WORD wPitch; // Frequency, in Hz, of the beep.WORD wOnDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep On.WORD wOffDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep Off// Beep Off is used to separate individual beeps} ITC_BEEP_SPEC;typedef enum tagITCBeepType{ITC_LOW_BEEP, // Issue the default low beep.ITC_HIGH_BEEP, // Issue the default high beep.ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP, // Issue a custom beep.} ITC_BEEP_TYPE;dwNumberOfBeeps [in] Identifies the total number of beeps inrgBeepRequests.Return ValuesE_NOTIMPL as this function is not implemented.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner$

Scanner SupportChapter —6164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeThis function retrieves the device-specific grid, the scanner enable status,and the LED control status for the current bar code reader engine.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[],DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );ParameterseAttr [in] Specifies the attribute. SeeIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute onpage 167 for the attributes.rgbAttrBuffer [out] Contains buffer for the attribute to bequeried. The structure of rgbAttrBufferdepends on the attribute being queried.See IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttritbutefor a description of these structures.dwAttrBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes thatrgbAttrBuffer can store.Return ValuesA standard status code that indicates success or failure.RemarksThe following attributes are not supported on the imager:SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLESITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVELSITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCYSITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBERSITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATIONSee AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter165700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadThis function reads data from the bar code input device. This method per-forms the same function as IADC::Read () except that it provides addition-al information about data received such as bar code symbology used, datatype, and time stamp of received data.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Read ( BYTErgbDataBuffer[],DWORD dwDataBufferSize, DWORDpnBytesReturned,ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILSpBarCodeDataDetails, DWORD dwTimeout );ParametersrgbDataBuffer [in] Pointer to the buffer that receives datafrom the device.dwDataBufferSize [in] Maximum number of bytes that can bestored in rgbDataBuffer.pnBytesReturned [out] Pointer to the DWORD location that willstore the bytes returned in rgbDataBuffer.pBarCodeDataDetails [in] Address of data structure in which to putthe data details. This may be NULL. TheITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS is:typedef struct tagITCBarCodeDetails{WORD wStructSize,ITC_BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_ID eSymbology,ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE eDataType,SYSTEMTIME stTimeStamp,}ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS;typedef enum tagBarCodeDataType{BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN = 1,BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII,BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE,}ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE;where:SwStructSize Size of structure. Used for versioning structure.SeSymbology Symbology of the returned data.SeDataType Identifies data types as ASCII, UNICODE, etc.SstTimeStamp Timestamp of the received data.SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN Data in unknown.SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII Data is ASCII.SBARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE Data is UNICODE.$

Scanner SupportChapter —6166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualdwTimeout [in] Number of milliseconds caller waits fordata. If you set a timeout, the call will beblocked until data is received.S0If data not available, returns quickly.SINFINITEWaits until data is available.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter167700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttributeThis function enables and disables the laser scanner, sets the bar code read-er engine specific grid, and enables or disables the reader engine LED con-trol.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[],DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );ParameterseAttr [in] Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attribute can be setat a time. The attributes are:SITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLEEnable or disable scanner for all connections.SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLEEnables and disables the reader engine from controllingthe good read LED.SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLEEnables and disables the reader engine from issuingbeeps.SITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVELSets beep volume level.SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCYSets beep frequency.SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBERSets number of beeps for a good read.SITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATIONSets duration of beeps for a good read.SITC_DHATTR_READFILTERThe ITC_READFILTER is the rgbData Data Structure.The ITC_READFILE structure is defined inIADCDEVICE.H as follows:typedef struct{#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240WORD nFilterChars;TCHAR szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];} ITC_READFILTER;where:SnFilterChars Number of characters in pszDataMask.SszFilter Data mask specification. See “Grid DataFiltering.”SITC_MAXFILTER_CHARSMaximum number of characters in a filter specification.Includes NULL termination.$

$Scanner SupportChapter —6168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualrgbAttrBuffer [in] Contains data for the attribute to be set. Dependingon eAttr,thergbAttrData will be mapped to theappropriate structure as shown in the following table .rgbAttrBuffer Data StructureseAttr Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBufferITC_RDRATTR_GRID ITC_BARCODEREADER_READER_GRIDReader Engine specific grid only.ITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE BOOLTRUE Enable scanner.FALSE Disable scanner.ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE BOOLTRUE Reader Engine controls good read LED.FALSE Good read LED is not controlled.ITC_RDRATTR_DATA_VALID_LED_ENABLE BOOLTRUE Reader Engine controls data valid LED.FALSE Data valid LED is not controlled.ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE BOOLTRUE Reader Engine issues beeps.FALSE Beeps are not issued.ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL ITC_BEEP_VOLUMEAn enumerator that identifies the beep volume level con-trol. Valid range for S9C:typedef enum tagBeepVolume{ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW = 0,ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM = 2,ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_HIGH = 1 //Default}ITC_BEEP_VOLUMENote: Due to the hardware design on this 700 Series Com-puter, the volume level can be eitherOFF (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW) orON (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM/HIGH).ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY DWORDA value that identifies the tone frequency in Hz. Validrange for S9C: 1000`4095 Hz (default: 2090).Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, thescanner rounds off the value to the nearest 10 Hz, then mul-tiplies the value by 10. For example, the value sent to thescanner is 2095. On retrieval, the value returned is 2090.$

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter169700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualrgbAttrBuffer Data Structures (continued)Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBuffereAttrITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBERAn enumerator identifying the good read beeps number.Valid range for S9C:typedef enum tagGoodReadBeepsNumber{ITC_NUM_BEEPS_NONE = 0,ITC_NUM_BEEPS_ONE = 1, // DefaultITC_NUM_BEEPS_TWO = 2}ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBERITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION DWORDValue identifying the good read beep duration in ms.Valid range for S9C: 0`2550 ms (Default: 80).Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, thescanner rounds the value to the nearest 10 ms, then multi-plies the value by 10.dwAttrBufferSize [in] The size of rgbAttrBuffer in bytes.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksRead ahead and non-read ahead clients can change the grid. Sincechanging the grid changes the entire reader engine grid, useIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute to retrieve the current readerengine grid and grid changes before sending back using SetAttribute. Thegrid structure is typedef struct tagBarCodeReaderGrid.{ITC_DI_GRID stDIGrid; // Device independent grid.ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID stDDGrid; // Reader engine dependent gridDWORD dwDataSourceTypeMask;} ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID;ITC_DI_GRIDtypedef struct tagItcBarCodeGrid{DWORD dwSymbologyMask; // Symbologies to be received.} ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID;When the scanner is enabled, it scans when the scan button is pressed orthe trigger is pulled. When the scanner is disabled, it does not respondwhen the scan button is pressed or the trigger is pulled.$

Scanner SupportChapter —6170 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe following attributes are not supported on the imager:SITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLESITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVELSITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCYSITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBERSITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATIONSee AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

6 Scanner Support—Chapter171700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScannerThis function turns the scanner on and off. The client application mustcoordinate control of the scanner with the user.SyntaxHRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner ( BOOLfScannerOn );ParametersfScannerOn [in] Set TRUE to turn the scanner on. Set FALSE to turnthe scanner off.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksThe scanner will be turned on or off independent of the actions of the us-ers. The client application must coordinate control of the scanner with theuser. When the scanner is turned on, its behavior is controlled by the trig-ger mode. That is, in one shot mode, the laser turns off when a label isscanned; in auto-trigger mode, the laser remains on.See AlsoSIBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequestSIBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLEDSIBarCodeReaderControl::InitializeSIBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeepSIBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttributeSIBarCodeReaderControl::ReadSIBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute

Scanner SupportChapter —6172 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig FunctionsThis interface provides methods to set and retrieve the 700 Series Com-puter bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized totheir defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded.GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such asITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicatethat no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This preventsthe called function from having to format the same S9C command andsend down to the S9C scanner.For all symbologies, to set a bar code length of “any length,” use a value of“0” for the bar code length argument.IS9CConfig functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the headerfile and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID valueused to obtain the interface.SIS9CConfig::GetCodabar (page 173)SIS9CConfig::SetCodabar (page 174)SIS9CConfig::GetCode39 (page 176)SIS9CConfig::SetCode39 (page 177)SIS9CConfig::GetCode93 (page 179)SIS9CConfig::SetCode93 (page 179)SIS9CConfig::GetCode128 (page 180)SIS9CConfig::SetCode128 (page 181)SIS9CConfig::GetI2of5 (page 183)SIS9CConfig::SetI2of5 (page 184)SIS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 (page 185)SIS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 (page 186)SIS9CConfig::GetMSI (page 187)SIS9CConfig::SetMSI (page 187)SIS9CConfig::GetPDF417 (page 188)SIS9CConfig::SetPDF417 (page 189)SIS9CConfig::GetPlessey (page 192)SIS9CConfig::SetPlessey (page 192)SIS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 (page 194)SIS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 (page 195)SIS9CConfig::GetTelepen (page 197)SIS9CConfig::SetTelepen (page 197)SIS9CConfig::GetUpcEan (page 198)SIS9CConfig::SetUpcEan (page 200)

6 Scanner Support—Chapter173700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetCodabarThis function retrieves the current settings of Codabar symbology.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP* peSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI*peCLSI, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[],DWORD* pdwNumBytes );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Codabarsymbology.peSS [out] Pointer to theITC_CODABAR_START_STOP location toreceive the Start/Stop option.peCLSI [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_CLSI locationto receive the CLSI library system.peCheck [out] Pointer to theITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT location toreceive the check digit.peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_IDlocation to receive an indicator of eitherITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]An array of bytes to receive 1 byte of data forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of datafor ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive anumber indicating number of bytes inrbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes forITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetCodabarThis function updates the Codabar settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODINGeDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP eSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSIeCLSI,ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_IDeLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[],DWORD dwNumBytes );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Codabar symbology.eSS [in] Identifies the Start/Stop option.eCLSI [in] Identifies the CLSI library system.eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.eLengthId [in] UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE toindicate no change for bar code length. UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length andminimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to avalid length value.Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH tocompose 1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]An array of bytes containing bar code lengths wheneLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, thisvalue is 1 wheneLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3when eLengthId =ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTHReturn ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter175700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCodabar Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecode Not Active ITC_CODABAR_DECODINGCLSI Library System Not Active ITC_CODABAR_CLSIStart/Stop Not Transmitted ITC_CODABAR_START_STOPCheck Digit Not Used ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGECodabar Enumerationstypedef enum tagCodabarDecoding{ITC_CODABAR_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_CODABAR_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_CODABAR_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODABAR_DECODING;typedef enum tagCodabarStartStop{ITC_CODABAR_SS_NOTXMIT, // DefaultITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCD, // a,b,c,dITC_CODABAR_SS_UPPERABCD, // A,B,C,DITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCDTN, // a,b,c,d / t,n,*,eITC_CODABAR_SS_DC1TODC4, // DC1,DC2,DC3,DC4ITC_CODABAR_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP;typedef enum tagCodabarClsi{ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_CODABAR_CLSI_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODABAR_CLSI;typedef enum tagCodabarCheckDigit{ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTUSED, // DefaultITC_CODABAR_CHECK_XMIT,ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTXMIT,ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId{ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;$

Scanner SupportChapter —6176 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetCode39This function retrieves the current settings of Code 39.SyntaxHRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_CODE39_FORMAT* peFormat,ITC_CODE39_START_STOP* peSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS* peSSChars,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pwLength );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Code 39.peFormat [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_FORMAT locationto receive the Code 39 format.peSS [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_START_STOPlocation to receive the Code 39 start/stop.peSSChars [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARSlocation to receive the Start/Stop character.peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the check digit.pwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the barcode length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter177700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetCode39This function updates the Code 39 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODINGeDecode,ITC_CODE39_FORMAT eFormat, ITC_CODE39_START_STOPeSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS eSSChars, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGITeCheck, DWORD dwLength );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code 39.eFormat [in] Identifies the Code 39 Format.eSS [in] Identifies the Start/Stop option.eSSChars [in] Identifies the Start/Stop character.eCheck [in] Identifies the Check digit.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Code 39 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Active ITC_CODE39_DECODINGFormat Standard 43 Character ITC_CODE39_FORMATStart/Stop Not Transmitted ITC_CODE39_START_STOPAccepted Start/stop Characters *only ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARSCheck Digit Not Used ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

$Scanner SupportChapter —6178 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 39 Enumerationstypedef enum tagCode39Decoding{ITC_CODE39_NOTACTIVE = 0,ITC_CODE39_ACTIVE = 1, // DefaultITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE39_DECODING;typedef enum tagCode39Format{ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_STANDARD43, // DefaultITC_CODE39_FORMAT_FULLASCII,ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE39_FORMAT;typedef enum tagCode39StartStop{ITC_CODE39_SS_NOTXMIT, // DefaultITC_CODE39_SS_XMIT,ITC_CODE39_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE39_START_STOP;typedef enum tagCode39StartStopChars{ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_DOLLARSIGN,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_ASTERISK, // DefaultITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_BOTH,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS;typedef enum tagCode39CheckDigit{ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NOTUSED, // DefaultITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_XMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_NOTXMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_XMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_NOTXMIT,ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT;$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter179700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetCode93This function retrieves the current settings of Code 93.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODING*peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE93_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Code 93symbology.pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a valuefor bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig::SetCode93This function updates the Code 93 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODINGeDecode,DWORD dwLength );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code93 Symbology.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Code 93 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_CODE93_DECODINGBar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

$Scanner SupportChapter —6180 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 93 EnumerationsUse this when the bar code length does not require any change.typedef enum tagCode93Decoding{ITC_CODE93_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_CODE93_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_CODE93_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE93_DECODING;#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255.IS9CConfig::GetCode128This function retrieves the current settings of Code 128 symbology.SyntaxHRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER* peEan128Ident,ITC_CODE128_CIP128 peCip128State, BYTE* pbyFNC1, DWORD*pdwLength );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Code 128symbology.peEan128Ident [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIERlocation to receive the EAN 128 identifier.peCip128State [out] Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_CIP128location to receive the CIP 128.pbyFNC1 [out] Pointer to the BYTE location to receive theFNC1 separator character.pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive avalue for bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter181700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetCode128This function updates the Code 128 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODINGeDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER eEan128Ident,ITC_CODE128_CIP128 eCip128State, BYTE byFNC1, DWORD dwLength);ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Code 128 symbology.eEan128Ident [in] Identifies the EAN 128 identifier.eCip128State [in] Identifies the CIP 128.byFNC1 [in] Identifies the FNC1 separator character, usuallyany ASCII value.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Code 128/EAN 128 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_CODE128_DECODINGEAN 128 Identifier Include ]C1 ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIERCIP 128 French PharmaceuticalCodesNot Active ITC_CODE128_CIP128FNC1 Separator Character (EAN128 norms)GS function CharASCII 29 or 0x1D0x00`0xFE ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGEBar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

$Scanner SupportChapter —6182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128 Enumerationstypedef enum tagCode128Decoding{ITC_CODE128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_CODE128_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_CODE128_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE128_DECODING;typedef enum tagEan128Identifier{ITC_EAN128_ID_REMOVE,ITC_EAN128_ID_INCLUDE, // DefaultITC_EAN128_ID_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER;typedef enum tagCode128Cip128{ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_CODE128_CIP128_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE128_CIP128;#define ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGE 255.This definition can be used when the Code128 FNC1 does not require any change.#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the barcode length does not require any change.The table below shows what to be expected for EAN 128 labels for varioussymbology identifier transmit configurations and EAN 128 Identifier op-tions.Setup Application’s Expected ResultEAN 128 ]C1 ID Symbology ID option EAN 128 Label Other Labels1 Include ]C1 Disabled <data> <data>2Remove]C1Disabled <data> <data>3 Include ]C1 AIM ID Transmitted ]C1<data> ]XY<data>4Remove]C1AIDIDTransmitted ]C1<data> ]XY<data>5 Include ]C1 Custom ID Transmitted Z]C1<data> Z<data>6Remove]C1Custom ID Transmitted Z<data> Z<data>where “X” is the symbology identifier, “Y” is the modifier character, and “Z” is the 1-byte symbology identifier.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter183700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetI2of5This function retrieves the current settings of Interleaved 2 of 5.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rbgLengthBuff[],DWORD* pdwNumBytes );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to theITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Interleaved2 of 5 symbology.peCheck [out] Pointer to theITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the check digit.peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_IDlocation to receive an indicator of eitherITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes of datafor ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive anumber indicating number of bytes inrbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes forITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetI2of5This function updates the Interleaved 2 of 5 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODINGeDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORDdwNumBytes );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Interleaved 2 of 5symbology.eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.eLengthId [in] UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE toindicate no change for bar code length. UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length andminimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to avalid length value. UseITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]Contains bar code lengths when eLengthId =Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orUse ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, thisvalue is 1 when eLengthId =ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Interleaved 2 of 5 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODINGCheck Digit Not Used ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter185700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInterleaved 2 of 5 Enumerationstypedef enum tagInterleaved2of5Decoding{ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING;typedef enum tagInterleaved2of5CheckDigit{ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, // DefaultITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT,ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT,ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT,ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT,ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId{ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5This function retrieves the current settings of Matrix 2 of 5.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING*peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5symbology.pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a valuefor the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.$

$Scanner SupportChapter —6186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5This function updates the Matrix 2 of 5 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODINGeDecode, DWORD dwLength );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5 symbology.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Matrix 2 of 5 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODINGBar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGEMatrix 2 of 5 Enumerationstypedef enum tagMatrix2of5Decoding{ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_MATRIX2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING;#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the barcode length does not require any change.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter187700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetMSIThis function retrieves the current MSI settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING* peDecode,ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_MSI_DECODING location toreceive the decoding for MSI symbology.peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the check digit.pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the barcode length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig::SetMSIThis function updates the MSI settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING eDecode,ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for MSI symbology.eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.MSI Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_MSI_DECODINGCheck Digit MOD 10 checked and transmitted ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE

$Scanner SupportChapter —6188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMSI Enumerationstypedef enum tagMsiDecoding{ITC_MSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_MSI_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_MSI_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_MSI_DECODING;typedef enum tagMsiCheckDigit{ITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT, // DefaultITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT,ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_XMIT,ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_NOTXMIT,ITC_MSI_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT;#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the barcode length does not require any change.IS9CConfig::GetPDF417This function retrieves the current PDF417 settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODING*pePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF* peMacroPdf,ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER* pePdfControlHeader,ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME* pePdfFileName,ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT* pePdfSegmentCount,ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP* pePdfTimeStamp, ITC_PDF417_SENDER*pePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE* pePdfAddressee,ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE* pePdfFileSize, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM*pePdfChecksum );ParameterspePdf417Decode [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_DECODING location toreceive the decoding for PDF417symbology.peMacroPdf [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF location toreceive the Macro PDF.pePdfControlHeader [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER locationto receive the control header.pePdfFileName [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME location toreceive the file name.pePdfSegmentCount [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNTlocation to receive the segment count.pePdfTimeStamp [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP location toreceive the time stamp.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter189700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualpePdfSender [out] Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_SENDERlocation to receive the sender.pePdfAddressee [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE location toreceive the addressee.pePdfFileSize [out] Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZElocation to receive the file size.pePdfChecksum [out] Pointer to theITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM location toreceive the checksum.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig::SetPDF417This function updates the PDF417 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODINGePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF eMacroPdf,ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER ePdfControlHeader,ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME ePdfFileName, ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNTePdfSegmentCount, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP ePdfTimeStamp,ITC_PDF417_SENDER ePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEEePdfAddressee, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE ePdfFileSize,ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM ePdfChecksum );ParametersePdf417Decode [in] Identifies the decoding for PDF417 symbology.eMacroPdf [in] Identifies the Macro PDF.ePdfControlHeader [in] Identifies the control header.ePdfFileName [in] Identifies the file name.ePdfSegmentCount [in] Identifies the segment count.ePdfTimeStamp [in] Identifies the time stamp.ePdfSender [in] Identifies the sender.ePdfAddressee [in] Identifies the addressee.ePdfFileSize [in] Identifies the file size.ePdfChecksum [in] Identifies the checksum.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.

$Scanner SupportChapter —6190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRemarksNone.See AlsoNone.PDF 417 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_PDF417_DECODINGMacro PDF Macro PDF Buffered ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDFControl Header Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER*File Name Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME*Segment Count Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT*Time Stamp Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP*Sender Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_SENDER*Address Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE*File Size Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE*Check Sum Not Transmitted ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM* These are Macro PDF Optional Fields.PDF 417 Enumerationstypedef enum tagPdf417Decoding{ITC_PDF417_NOTACTIVE = 0,ITC_PDF417_ACTIVE = 1, // DefaultITC_PDF417_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_DECODING;typedef enum tagPdf417MacroPdf{ITC_PDF417_MACRO_UNBUFFERED = 0,ITC_PDF417_MACRO_BUFFERED = 1, // DefaultITC_PDF417_MACRO_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF;typedef enum tagPdf417ControlHeader{ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER;typedef enum tagPdf417FileName{ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME;typedef enum tagPdf417SegmentCount{ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_XMIT = 1,$

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter191700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT;typedef enum tagPdf417TimeStamp{ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP;typedef enum tagPdf417Sender{ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_SENDER_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_SENDER;typedef enum tagPdf417Addressee{ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE;typedef enum tagPdf417FileSize{ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE;typedef enum tagPdf417Checksum{ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_XMIT = 1,ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM;$

Scanner SupportChapter —6192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetPlesseyThis function retrieves the current Plessey settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength);ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Plesseysymbology.peCheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the check digit.pdwLength [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the barcode length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig::SetPlesseyThis function updates the Plessey settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODINGeDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Plessey symbology.eCheck [in] Identifies the check digit.dwLength [in] Identifies the bar code length.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter193700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPlessey Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_PLESSEY_DECODINGCheck Digit Not Transmitted ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGEPlessey Enumerationstypedef enum tagPlesseyDecoding{ITC_PLESSEY_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_PLESSEY_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_PLESSEY_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING;typedef enum tagPlesseyCheckDigit{ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_XMIT = 1,ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT;#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the barcode length does not require any change.$

Scanner SupportChapter —6194 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5This function retrieves the current Standard 2 of 5 settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5(ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING* peDecode,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT* peFormat,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff,DWORD* pdwNumBytes );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to theITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for Standard2 of 5 symbology.peFormat [out] Pointer to theITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT locationto receive the format.peCheck [out] Pointer to theITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive Modulo 10 check digit.peLengthId [out] Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_IDlocation to receive an indicator of eitherITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.rgbLengthBuff [out,size_is(3)]An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of datafor ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.pdwNumBytes [out] Pointer to the DWORD location to receive anumber indicating number of bytes inrbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte forITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes forITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter195700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5This function updates the Standard 2 of 5 settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5(ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING eDecode, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMATeFormat, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORDdwNumBytes );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Standard 2 of 5symbology.eFormat [in] Identifies the format.eCheck [in] Identifies the Modulo 10 check digit.eLengthId [in] UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE toindicate no change for bar code length. UseITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length andminimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to avalid length value. UseITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:rgbLengthBuff[0],rgbLengthBuff[1],rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values.rgbLengthBuff [in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]An array of bytes containing bar code lengths wheneLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH orITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.dwNumBytes [in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, thisvalue is 1 when eLengthId =ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$Scanner SupportChapter —6196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStandard 2 of 5 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODINGFormat Identicon (6 Start/Stop bars) ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMATCheck Digit Not Used ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGITBar Code Length Minimum Length = 6 0x00-0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGEStandard 2 of 5 Enumerationstypedef enum tagStandard2of5Decoding{ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_STANDARD2OF5_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING;typedef enum tagStandard2of5Format{ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_IDENTICON, // DefaultITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_COMPUTER_IDENTICS,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT;typedef enum tagStandard2of5CheckDigit{ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, // DefaultITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_XMIT,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTXMIT,ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId{ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0,ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH,ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter197700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::GetTelepenThis function retrieves the current Telepen settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*peDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* peFormat );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for TELEPENsymbology.peFormat [out] Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT location toreceive the format.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig::SetTelepenThis function updates the Telepen settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*eDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* eFormat );ParameterseDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for Telepen symbology.eFormat [in] Identifies the format.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Telepen Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_TELEPEN_DECODINGFormat ASCII ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT

$Scanner SupportChapter —6198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTelepen Enumerationstypedef enum tagTelepenDecoding{ITC_TELEPEN_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_TELEPEN_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_TELEPEN_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING;typedef enum tagTelepenDecoding{ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_ASCII, // DefaultITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NUMERIC,ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT;IS9CConfig::GetUpcEanThis function retrieves the current UPC/EAN settings.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING*upceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT* upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECT*upcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT* ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECT*ean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS* upcAddOnDigits,ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO* upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE*upcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT* upcACheck,ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT* upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT*ean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT* ean13Check,ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcANumSystem,ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE*upcAReencode, ITC_UPCE_REENCODE* upcEReencode,ITC_EAN8_REENCODE* ean8Reencode );ParametersupceanDecode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_DECODINGlocation to receive the decoding for UPC/EANsymbology.upcASelect [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_SELECT location toreceive the UPC-A selection state.upcESelect [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_SELECT location toreceive the UPC-E selection state.ean8Select [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_SELECT location toreceive the EAN-8 selection state.ean13Select [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_SELECT locationto receive the EAN-13 selection state.upcAddOnDigits [out] Pointer to theITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS location toreceive the add-on digits.upcAddOn2 [out] Pointer to theITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO location toreceive the add-on 2 digits.upcAddOn5 [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVElocation to receive the add-on 5 digits.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter199700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualupcACheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the UPC-A check digit.upcECheck [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the UPC-E check digit.ean8Check [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the EAN-8 check digit.ean13Check [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGITlocation to receive the EAN-13 check digit.upcANumSystem [out] Pointer to theITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM location toreceive the UPC-A number system.upcENumSystem [out] Pointer to theITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM location toreceive the UPC-E number system.upcAReencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_REENCODElocation to receive the UPC-A reencoding.upcEReencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_REENCODElocation to receive the UPC-E reencoding.ean8Reencode [out] Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_REENCODElocation to receive the EAN-8 reencoding.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig::SetUpcEanThis function updates the UPC/EAN settings with new values.SyntaxHRESULT IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODINGupceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECTupcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECTean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS upcAddOnDigits,ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVEupcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT upcACheck,ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGITean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT ean13Check,ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM upcANumSystem, ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEMupcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE upcAReencode,ITC_UPCE_REENCODE upcEReencode, ITC_EAN8_REENCODEean8Reencode );ParametersupceanDecode [in] Identifies the decoding for UPC/EAN symbology.upcASelect [in] Identifies the UPC-A selection state.upcESelect [in] Identifies the UPC-E selection state.ean8Select [in] Identifies the EAN-8 selection state.ean13Select [in] Identifies the EAN-13 selection state.upcAddOnDigits [in] Identifies the Add-on digits.upcAddOn2 [in] Identifies the Add-on 2 digits.upcAddOn5 [in] Identifies the Add-on 5 digits.upcACheck [in] Identifies the UPC-A check digit.upcECheck [in] Identifies the UPC-E check digit.ean8Check [in] Identifies the EAN-8 check digit.ean13Check [in] Identifies the EAN-13 check digit.upcANumSystem [in] Identifies the UPC-A number system.upcENumSystem [in] Identifies the UPC-E number system.upcAReencode [in] Identifies the UPC-A reencoding.upcEReencode [in] Identifies the UPC-E reencoding.ean8Reencode [in] Identifies the EAN-8 reencoding.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter201700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUPC/EAN Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding ITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE This parameter is no longer used, set it to this value.UPC-A Active ITC_UPCA_SELECTUPC-E Active ITC_UPCE_SELECTEAN-8 Active ITC_EAN8_SELECTEAN-13 Active ITC_EAN13_SELECTAdd On Digits Not Required ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITSAdd On 2 Digits Not Active ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWOAdd On 5 Digits Not Active ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVEUPC-A Check Digit Transmitted ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGITUPC-E Check Digit Transmitted ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGITEAN-8 Check Digit Transmitted ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGITEAN-13 Check Digit Transmitted ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGITUPC-A Number System Transmitted ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEMUPC-E Number System Transmitted ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEMReencode UPC-A UPC-A transmitted as EAN-13 ITC_UPCA_REENCODEReencode UPC-E UPC-E transmitted as UPC-E ITC_UPCE_REENCODEReencode EAN-8 EAN-8 transmitted as EAN-8 ITC_EAN8_REENCODEUPC/EAN Enumerationstypedef enum tagUpcEanDecoding{ITC_UPCEAN_NOTACTIVE = 0,ITC_UPCEAN_ACTIVE = 1, // DefaultITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING;typedef enum tagUpcASelect{ITC_UPCA_DEACTIVATE,ITC_UPCA_ACTIVATE, // DefaultITC_UPCA_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCA_SELECT;typedef enum tagUpcESelect{ITC_UPCE_DEACTIVATE,ITC_UPCE_ACTIVATE, // DefaultITC_UPCE_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCE_SELECT;typedef enum tagEan8Select{ITC_EAN8_DEACTIVATE,ITC_EAN8_ACTIVATE, // DefaultITC_EAN8_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN8_SELECT;typedef enum tagEan13Select{ITC_EAN13_DEACTIVATE,$

$Scanner SupportChapter —6202 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualITC_EAN13_ACTIVATE, // DefaultITC_EAN13_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN13_SELECT;typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonDigits{ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NOT_REQUIRED, // DefaultITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_REQUIRED,ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS;typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonTwo{ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO;typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonFive{ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NOTACTIVE = 0, // DefaultITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_ACTIVE = 1,ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE;typedef enum tagUpcACheckDigit{ITC_UPCA_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_UPCA_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_UPCA_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagUpcECheckDigit{ITC_UPCE_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_UPCE_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_UPCE_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagEan8CheckDigit{ITC_EAN8_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_EAN8_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_EAN8_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagEan13CheckDigit{ITC_EAN13_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_EAN13_CHECK_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_EAN13_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT;typedef enum tagUpcANumberSystem{ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM;typedef enum tagUpcENumberSystem{ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0,ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, // DefaultITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM;typedef enum tagUpcAReencode{$

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter203700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_EAN13, // DefaultITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_UPCA,ITC_UPCA_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCA_REENCODE;typedef enum tagUpcEReencode{ITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCE, // DefaultITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCA,ITC_UPCE_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_UPCE_REENCODE;typedef enum tagEan8Reencode{ITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN8, //DefaultITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN13,ITC_EAN8_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_EAN8_REENCODE;$

Scanner SupportChapter —6204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2 FunctionsThis interface is derived from the IS9CConfig interface and provides addi-tional methods that can be used to set and retrieve the 700 Series Comput-er’ s bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized totheir defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded.GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such asITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicatethat no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This preventsthe called function from having to format the same S9C command andsend it down to the scanner.To specify a bar code length of “any length,” use a value of “0” for the barcode length argument.IS9CConfig2 functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the headerfile and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID valueused to obtain the interface.SIS9CConfig2::GetCode11 (page 205)SIS9CConfig2::SetCode11 (page 205)SIS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds (page 207)SIS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds (page 208)SIS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble (page 211)SIS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble (page 212)SIS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext (page 213)SIS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext (page 213)SIS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit (page 214)SIS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit (page 214)

6 Scanner Support—Chapter205700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::GetCode11This function retrieves the current settings for Code 11.SyntaxHRESULT GetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING* peDecode,ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck,ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION* peVer );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to ITC_CODE11_DECODING location toreceive Code 11 decoding.peCheck [out] Pointer to ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT locationto receive the check digit option.peVer [out] Pointer toITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION locationto receive the check verification option.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig2::SetCode11This function updates the current setting of Code 11 symbology.SyntaxHRESULT SetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING eDecode,ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATIONeVer );ParameterseDecode [in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option forCode 11.eCheck [in] An enumeration that identifies the check digit option.eVer [in] An enumeration that identifies check verification option.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$Scanner SupportChapter —6206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 11 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_CODE11_DECODINGCheck Verification 1 Digit ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATIONCheck Digit Enable ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGITCode 11 Enumerationstypedef enum tagCode11Decoding{ITC_CODE11_NOTACTIVE = 0,ITC_CODE11_ACTIVE = 1, // DefaultITC_CODE11_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE11_DECODING;typedef enum tagCode11CheckVerification{ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_ONEDIGIT = 1,ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_TWODIGIT = 2, // DefaultITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION;typedef enum tagCode11CheckDigit{ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, // DefaultITC_CODE11_CHECK_XMIT = 1,ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT;$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter207700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIdsThis function retrieves all the custom symbology identifiers defined for thecurrently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-er on the 700 Series Computer.SyntaxHRESULT GetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*pStructSymIdPair,DWORD dwMaxNumElement, DWORD* pdwNumElement);ParameterspStructSymIdPair [out] Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIRlocation to receive the current definedsymbology identifiers for the supportedsymbologies. The caller must preallocatethis buffer with dwMaxNumElementelements.dwMaxNumElement [in] Maximum number of elements allocatedfor the pStructSymIdPair buffer whichshould always be equal to the last definedenumeration constant + 1 of theenumeration ITC_CUSTOM_ID. In thiscase, it isITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT.pdwNumElement [out] Pointer to DWORD location to receivethe actual number of elements returned inthe pStructSymIdPair buffer, which shouldbe the same as dwMaxNumElement.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoSCustom Identifier Assignments (page 209)SCustom Identifier Example (page 210)SCustom Identifier Default Settings (page 210)

Scanner SupportChapter —6208 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIdsThis function updates the symbology identifiers (any ASCII values) for thecurrently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-er on the 700 Series Computer.SyntaxHRESULT SetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*pStructSymIdPair, DWORD dwNumElement );ParameterspStructSymIdPair [in] Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIRlocation, containing the new symbologyidentifiers for any supported symbologies toupdate.dwNumElement [in] Identifies the number of symbology identifiersto update in the pStructSymIdPair buffer.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter209700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCustom Identifier AssignmentsEach custom identifier is a one byte ASCII value within the range from0x00 to 0xff. The enumerations in the ITC_CUSTOM_ID enumeratorcan be used as symbology identifications in the GetCustomSymIds() andSetCustomSymIds() functions.typedef enum tagCustomId{ITC_CUSTOMID_CODABAR = 0 Identifies the Codabar symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_CODE39 Identifies the Code 39 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_CODE93 Identifies the Code 93 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_CODE128_EAN_128 Identifies the Code 128 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_EAN8 Identifies the EAN-8 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_EAN13 Identifies the EAN-13 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_I2OF5 Identifies the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_MATRIX2OF5 Identifies the Matrix 2 of 5 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_MSI Identifies the MSI symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_PDF417 Identifies the PDF 417 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_PLESSEY Identifies the Plessey symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_CODE2OF5 Identifies the Standard 2 of 5 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_TELEPEN Identifies the Telepen symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA Identifies the UPC-A symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE Identifies the UPC-E symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_CODE11 Identifies the Code 11 symbologyITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT Identifies the last element. Use to preallocatethe buffer on GetCustomSymIds}ITC_CUSTOM_ID;typedef struct tagCustSymbIdPair{ITC_CUSTOM_ID eSymbology; Identifies the symbology of interestBYTE byteId;ASCII value (1 byte within the range0x00 – 0xf)}ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR;$

Scanner SupportChapter —6210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCustom Identifier Default SettingsSymbology Default Valid RangeCodabar D0x00-0xFFCode 11 *0x00-0xFFCode 39 *0x00-0xFFCode 93 D0x00-0xFFCode128/EAN 128 D0x00-0xFFEAN-8 0xFF 0x00-0xFFEAN-13 F0x00-0xFFInterleaved 2 of 5 I0x00-0xFFMatrix 2 of 5 D0x00-0xFFMSI D0x00-0xFFPDF 417 *0x00-0xFFPlessey D0x00-0xFFStandard 2 of 5 D0x00-0xFFTelepen *0x00-0xFFUPC-A A0x00-0xFFUPC-E E0x00-0xFFCustom Identifier ExampleThe following code segment is an example of updating the UPC-E andUPC-A symbology identifiers with new values, and then retrieving thecurrently defined symbology identifiers for all the supported symbologies:ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR oStructSymIdPair [ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT];oStructSymIdPair[0].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE;oStructSymIdPair[0].byteId = 0x41; // ASCII char AoStructSymIdPair[1].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA;oStructSymIdPair[1].byteId = 0x42; // ASCII char BHRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->SetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0], 2];DWORD dwNum = 0;HRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->GetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0],ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT, &dwNum);

6 Scanner Support—Chapter211700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmbleThis retrieves the scanner’ s current preamble or postamble setting.SyntaxHRESULT GetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTErgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize, DWORD* pdwBufferSize );ParameterseAmbleId [in] An enumeration of typeITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whetherthe preamble or postamble setting is to beretrieved. Only one setting can be queried at atime.rgbBuffer [in] Contains the buffer for the postamble orpreamble setting to be queried.dwBufferSize [in] The maximum number of bytes that rgbBuffercan store. Must be at leastITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_MAX_CHARS bytes.pdwBufferSize [out] A pointer to DWORD location to store theactual number of returned bytes in rgbBuffer.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmbleThis function updates the scanner’ s current preamble or postamble settingdepending on the input parameters.SyntaxHRESULT SetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTErgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize );ParameterseAmbleId [in] An enumeration of typeITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whetherthe preamble or postamble setting is to be updated.Only one setting can be updated at a time.rgbBuffer [in] Contains the buffer for the postamble or preamblesetting to be updated.dwBufferSize [in] Identifies number of bytes in rgbBuffer.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.Postamble and Preamble DefaultsParameter Default Valid RangePreamble Null 0to20ASCIIcharactersPostamble Null 0to20ASCIIcharacters

6 Scanner Support—Chapter213700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig2::GetPDF417ExtThis function is an extended function for retrieving the PDF 417 settingsnot included in the IS9CConfig::GetPDF417.SyntaxHRESULT GetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING* peDecode,ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION* peCode128 );ParameterspeDecode [out] Pointer to ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODINGlocation to receive the Micro PDF 417 decoding.peCode128 [out] Pointer toITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION*location to receive the Micro PDF 417 Code 128emulation option.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417ExtThis function is an extended function for updating the additional PDF417 settings not included in IS9CConfig::SetPDF417.SyntaxHRESULT SetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING eDecode,ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION eCode128 );ParameterseDecode [in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option for theMicro PDF 417.eCode128 [in] An enumeration that identifies the Code 128 emulationoption for the Micro PDF 417.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default SettingsParameter Default Valid RangeDecoding Not Active ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODINGCode 128 Emulation Not Active ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION* These are Micro PDF 417 parameters.IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmitThis function retrieves the current symbology ID transmission option asdescribed on the next page.SyntaxHRESULT GetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT* peSymIdXmit );ParameterspeSymIdXmit [out] Pointer to ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMITlocation to receive the current symbologyidentifier transmission option.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmitThis updates the symbology ID transmission option shown next page.SyntaxHRESULT SetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT eSymIdXmit );ParameterseSymIdXmit [in] Identifies the symbology identifier transmissionoption to update.Return ValuesHRESULT that indicates success or failure.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter215700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbology ID Transmission OptionThe symbology identifier (or code mark) concept provides a standardizedway for a device receiving data from a bar code reader to differentiate be-tween the symbologies.The following symbology ID transmission option specifies whether or notthe symbology ID should be transmitted as part of the scanned bar codelabel to all the connected data collection applications. Options for trans-mission are: do not transmit, transmit the standard AIM identifiers, ortransmit the one byte custom defined identifiers. AIM and custom identi-fiers cannot be selected to be transmitted at the same time; only the lastselected option will be active.typedef enum tagSymbologyIdXmit{ITC_ID_XMIT_DISABLE = 0 Symbology identifier will not be transmitted as part of thelabel. This is the default setting.ITC_ID_XMIT_CUSTOM = 1 Activate custom symbology identifier transmission for allsymbologies. Example of the transmitted label:[preamble] [Custom ID] <data> [postamble]ITC_ID_XMIT_AIM = 2 Activate AIM symbology identifier transmission for allsymbologies. Example of the transmitted label:[preamble] [AIM symbology ID] <data> [postamble]}ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT;$

Scanner SupportChapter —6216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIS9CConfig3 FunctionsThe IS9CConfig3 interface provides generic methods for retrieving andsetting configuration using ISCP commands.ISCP CommandsAn ISCP Command is composed of three or more bytes formatted as<SG><FID><parameters> where:SSG Setup group.SFID Function ID.Sparameters One or more configuration value bytes depending on theconfiguration.ISCP commands include the following:Imager SettingsThis dictates the start and end column positions for the image dimension.SG FID Parameter Description0x7B 80 Value [0..639] Start column position.0x7B 81 Value [0..639] End column position.Trigger SettingsThis sets the duration of the aiming beam before acquiring images to bedecoded.SG FID Parameter Description0x70 81 Value [0..65535] Number of milliseconds.QRCode SymbologyThis enables or disables the QRCode symbology.SG FID Parameter Description0x55 40 0 Disable this symbology.0x55 40 1 Enable this symbology.Data Matrix SymbologyThis enables or disables the Data Matrix symbology.SG FID Parameter Description0x54 40 0 Disable this symbology.0x54 40 1 Enable this symbology.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter217700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualISCP::GetConfigThis retrieves configurations using the ISCP commands format.SyntaxHRESULT ISCPGetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORDdwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORDdwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );ParametersrgbCommandBuff [in, size_is] Contains ISCP commands inarray of bytes.dwCommandBuffSize [in] Number of bytes inrgbCommandBuff.rgbReplyBuff [in, out, size_is] Results of query in array ofbytes.dwReplyBuffMaxSize [in] Maximum size of rgdReplyBuff.pdwReplyBuffSize [in, out] Number of bytes placed inrbfReplyBuff.Return ValuesNone.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualISCP::SetConfigThis updates configurations using the ISCP commands format.SyntaxHRESULT ISCPSetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORDdwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORDdwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );ParametersrgbCommandBuff [in, size_is] Contains ISCP commands inarray of bytes.dwCommandBuffSize [in] Number of bytes inrgbCommandBuff.rgbReplyBuff [in, out, size_is] Results of request in array ofbytes.dwReplyBuffMaxSize [in] Maximum size of rgbReplyBuff.pdwReplyBuffSize [in, out] Number of bytes placed inrgbReplyBuff.Return ValuesNone.RemarksNone.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter219700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualAIM Symbology ID DefaultsRefer to the official AIM documentation on symbology identifiers for fullinformation on the different processing options supported.Symbology ID Character Modifier CharactersCodabar F 0 Standard Codabar symbol. No special processing.1 ABC Codabar (American Blood commission)concatenate/message append performed.2 Reader has validated the check character.4 Reader has stripped the check character before transmission.Code 11 H0 Single modulo 11 check character validated and transmitted.1 Two modulo 11 check characters validated and transmitted.3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.Code 39 A 0 No check character validation nor full ASCII processing. All datatransmitted as decoded.1 Modulo 43 check character validated and transmitted.3 Modulo 43 check character validated but not transmitted.4 Full ASCII character conversion performed. No check charactervalidation.5 Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 checkcharacter validated and transmitted.7 Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 checkcharacter validated but not transmitted.Code 93 G0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.Code128 C 0 Standard data packet. No FNC1 in first or second symbolcharacter position after start character.1 EAN/UCC-128 data packet. FNC1 in first symbol characterposition after start character.2 FNC1 in second symbol character position after start character.4 Concatenation according to International Society for BloodTransfusion specifications was performed. Concatenated datafollows.Interleaved 2 of 5 I0 No check character validation.1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted3 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted.Matrix 2 of 5 X0`FFor symbologies or symbology options not listed, a code characterwith the value 0-F may be assigned by the decoder manufacturerto identify those symbologies and options implemented in thereader.MSI M0 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted.1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted.

Scanner SupportChapter —6220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualModifier CharactersID CharacterSymbology (continued)PDF 417/Micro PDF 417L 0 Reader set to conform with protocol defined in 1994 PDF 417specifications.1 Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for ExtendedChannel Interpretation (all data characters 92 doubled).2 Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for Basic ChannelInterpretation (data characters 92 are not doubled).3 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 in first position.4 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 after initial letter or pair ofdigits.5 Code 128 emulation: no implied FNC1.Plessey P0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.Standard 2 of 5(2-bar start/stop)R 0 No check character validation.1 Modulo 7 check character validated and transmitted.3 Modulo 7 check character validated but not transmitted.Standard 2 of 5(3-bar start/stop)S0 No options specified. Always transmit 0.Telepen B0FullASCIImode1 Double density numeric only mode2 Double density numeric followed by full ASCII4 Full ASCII followed by double density numericUPC/EAN EConsider UPC/EAN symbols with supplements as two separate sym-bols. The first symbol is the main data packet, and the second symbolis the 2 or 5 digit supplement. Transmit these two symbols separately,each with its own symbology identifier. Provision is made for the op-tion of transmitting both symbols as a single data packet.0 Standard data packet in full EAN format (13 digits for EAN-13,UPC-A, and UPC-E; does not include add-on data).1 Two digit add-on data only.2 Five digit add-on data only.3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13,UPC-A, or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from add-on symbol.4EAN-8datapacketIMPORTANT: The “symbology_id” character letter must be uppercase for the above definitions.

$6 Scanner Support—Chapter221700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIImage InterfaceThe IImage interface gives the application the capability to acquire images.The image acquired can be either a raw image as captured by the digitalcamera or it can be normalized. A normalized image is presented the sameas if the picture were taken at right angles to the image and at the samedistance. The normalized image is commonly used for signature captureapplications.SIImage::ReadSigCapBuffer (page 221)SIImage::ReadSigCapFile (page 224)SIImage::ReadImage (page 225)SIImage::CancelReadImage (page 226)SIImage::Start (page 226)SIImage::Stop (page 227)SIImage::Open (page 227)SIImage::Close (page 228)IImage::ReadSigCapBufferSyntaxHRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC*pSigCapSpec, ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD nMaxBuffSize);ParametersParameters:pSigCapSpec [in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signaturecapture region. This structure is defined as follows:typedef struct tagITCSigCapSpec{DWORD dwStructSize;INT iAspectRatio;INT iOffsetX;INT iOffsetY;UINT uiWidth;UINT uiHeight;INT iResolution;ITCFileFormat eFormat;DWORD eDepth;} ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC;where:SdwStructSize Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for version control.SiAspectRatio Ratio of the bar code height (linear bar codes) or rowheight (2D bar codes) to the narrow element width.SiOffsetX Offset in X direction, relative to barcode center.Positive values are right of the bar code, negativevalues to the left.$

$Scanner SupportChapter —6222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSiOffsetY Offset in Y direction, relative to barcode center.Positive values are higher than the bar code, negativevalues lower.SuiWidth Width of signature capture image region in intelligentbar code units.SuiHeight Height of the signature capture image region inintelligent bar code units.SiResolution Number of pixels per intelligent bar code unit.SeFormat Format of the image buffer returned as follows.Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported.ITC_FILE_KIM = 0, // Returns data a KIM fileITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN = 1, // TIFF Binary fileITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 = 2, // TIFF Binary Group 4 compressedITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE = 3, // TIFF Gray ScaleITC_FILE_RAW = 4, // Raw imageITC_FILE_JPEG = 5, // JPEG imageSeDepth Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only one(monochrome) or eight (gray-scale) are supported.pImgBuffer [out] Pointer to the buffer in which the signature captureimage will be put.typedef struct tagITCImageSpec{DWORD dwStructSize;LONG biWidth;LONG biHeight;WORD biBitCount;ITC_FILE_FORMAT eFormat;DWORD biActualImageSize;DWORD biMaxImageBytes;BYTE rgbImageData[1];} ITC_IMAGE_SPEC;where:SdwStructSize Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for versioncontrol.SbiWidth The width of each row in pixels.SbiHeight The number of rows in the image data.SbiBitCount The number of bits per pixel.SeFormat Identifies the image format.SbiActualImageSize Total bytes of image data returned.SbiMaxImageBytes Maximum bytes that can be stored inrgbImageData[].SrgbImageData Buffer containing the actual data, for example a640x480 uses a 307200-byte buffer. The array sizeof this buffer is arbitrary so do not use thisstructure directly to reserve memory. The actualdimension of the buffer is identified bybiMaxImageBytes.$

6 Scanner Support—Chapter223700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualReturn ValuesHRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes willbe returned:SS_OKImage successfully returned.SITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_EThe specified region is not in the image.SITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_EA bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded wasnot a signature capture symbology.SITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_EpImgBuffer is too small to contain the signature captured image.SITC_INV_PARAMETER_EOne of the parameters is invalid.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_EThe device had not been opened.RemarksReadSigCapBuffer() will return the image from the last decoded label withdimensions identified by the calling parameter. This signature captureregion must include the signature capture bar code. The supported barcodes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128, and Code 39. Thecaller specifies the width, height, and center of the image to be retrieved.This image is independent of any rotation of the bar code relative to theimager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the code itself upside downto the imager, the retrieved image will still be right side up. However, ifthe specified image is outside the field of view a result code ofITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned.This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-tion are in units called “Intelligent Bar Code Units.” An Intelligent BarCode Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code.The dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified ResolutionResulting Height = Specified Height * Specified ResolutionSee AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIImage::ReadSigCapFileNote: This has not been implemented as of this publication.SyntaxHRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapFile( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC*pSigCapSpec, LPCTSTR pszFileName );ParameterspSigCapSpec [in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signaturecapture region. See ReadSigCapFile (page 221) fora description of this structure.pszFileName [in] Name of the file in which to copy the image.Return ValuesHRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes willbe returned:SS_OKImage successfully returned.SITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_EThe specified region is not in the image.SITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_EA bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded wasnot a signature capture symbology.SITC_FILE_OPEN_EThe file could not be opened.SITC_INV_PARAMETER_EOne of the parameters is invalid.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_EThe device had not been opened.RemarksReadSigCapFile() will write the image from the last decoded label with di-mensions identified by the calling parameter. If the file already exists, itscontents will be overwritten.This signature capture region must include the signature capture bar code.The supported bar codes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128,and Code 39. The caller specifies the width, height, and center of theimage to be retrieved. This image is independent of any rotation of the barcode relative to the imager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the codeitself upside down to the imager, the retrieved image will still be right sideup. However, if the specified image is outside the field of view a resultcode of ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned.This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-tion are in units called “Intelligent Bar Code Units”. An Intelligent BarCode Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter225700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified ResolutionResulting Height = Specified Height * Specified ResolutionSee AlsoNone.IImage::ReadImageSyntaxHRESULT IImage::Read( ITCFileFormat eFormat, DWORD nDepth,ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD dwTimeout );ParameterseFormat [in] Format of the image buffer returned as follows.Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported.ITC_FILE_KIM = 0, // Returns data a KIM fileITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN = 1, // TIFF Binary fileITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 = 2, // TIFF Binary Group 4 compressedITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE = 3, // TIFF Gray ScaleITC_FILE_RAW = 4, // Raw imageITC_FILE_JPEG = 5, // JPEG imagenDepth [in] Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only eight(gray-scale) are supported.pImgBuffer [in/out] Pointer to the buffer containing the image.dwTimeout [in] Milliseconds to wait for the image to be returned.Return ValuesHRESULT identifying success or error. On error, these will be returned:SS_OK Image successfully returned.SITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E pImgBuffer is too small to containthe signature captured image.SITC_TIMEOUT_E Timeout.SITC_INV_PARAMETER_E One of the parameters is invalid.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.RemarksThe image is returned in pImgBuffer in the caller specified format.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIImage::CancelReadImageSyntaxHRESULT IImage::CancelReadImage( );ParametersNone.Return ValuesStatus code indicating success or failure as follows:SS_OK Imager closed.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.RemarksThis function causes a pending image read of IImage::ReadImage() to re-turn immediately with an error status. The purpose of this function is toallow the application to release a thread blocked on the ReadImage() call.See AlsoNone.IImage::StartSyntaxHRESULT IImage::Start( );ParametersNone.Return ValuesStatus code indicating success or failure as follows:SS_OK Imager started.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.RemarksThis function starts the image continuously capturing images.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter227700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIImage::StopSyntaxHRESULT IImage::Stop( );ParametersNone.Return ValuesStatus code indicating success or failure as follows:SS_OK Imager started.SS_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E Unit does not contain an imager.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Device had not been opened.RemarksThis function stops the image continuously capturing images.See AlsoNone.IImage::OpenSyntaxHRESULT IImage::Open( BOOL fSigCapEnable );ParametersfSigCapEnable [in] When TRUE, signature capture is enabled. WhenFALSE, it is disabled. Bar code labels are decodedand images (via IImage::ReadImage) the same.Return ValuesStatus code indicating success or failure as follows:SS_OK Imager opened.SS_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E Unit does not contain an imager.SS_DEVICE_CONTENTION_E Device has already been opened.RemarksThis function exclusively allocates the imager device so that the other IIm-age methods can be safely called.See AlsoNone.

Scanner SupportChapter —6228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIImage::CloseSyntaxHRESULT IImage::Close( );ParametersNone.Return ValuesStatus code indicating success or failure as follows:SS_OK Imager closed.SS_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened.RemarksThis function releases the imager device so that other applications canopen it. An IImage::Release() will also close the imager device.See AlsoNone.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter229700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData Collection ConfigurationScanner settings for the 700 Series Computer can be configured via theData Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tapStart →Settings →the System tab →the Data Collection icon. See Ap-pendix A,“Control Panel Applets” for more information about the followingparameters. Note that these are in alphabetical order.SCodabar (page 292)SCode 11 (page 306)SCode 128 (page 295)SCode 128 Options (page 296)SCode 128 FNC1 Character (page 297)SCode 39 (page 290)SCode 93 (page 294)SCode 93 Length (page 294)SData Matrix (page 308)SInterleaved 2 of 5 (page 303)SMatrix 2 of 5 (page 304)SMSI (page 299)SPDF 417 (page 300)SMacro PDF (page 300)SMicro PDF 417 (page 302)SPlessey (page 298)SQR Code (page 307)SStandard 2 of 5 (page 291)STelepen (page 305)SUPC/EAN (page 293)

Scanner SupportChapter —6230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTethered ScannerThe Intermec Tethered Scanner feature accepts data from the COM1 portwedges it to the keyboard interface, and allows some ADC. This featurecan be enabled or disabled from the Today Screen on the 700 Series Com-puter.Enabling and DisablingOn the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Today. Tap the bar code scan-ner icon in the System Tray (circled in the following illustration). Initially,the bar code scanner icon indicates that this feature is disabled (shown tothe left).SSelect Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 SeriesComputer through the COM1 port from an external input device, askeyboard data to an application on the desktop.For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 SeriesComputer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected tothe COM1 port will appear in the Word document. If another datacollection application is running and is active on the 700 Series Com-puter, the scanned information will appear in that application.Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sent bythe external input device, you cannot control the device or the data formatusing any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs from theSDK or the internal Data Collection software. The external input device isgoverned by what software it has onboard to tell it how to scan, take pic-tures, or send the data elsewhere.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter231700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSSelect 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scannerto scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 TetheredScanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac-ters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to dothat. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device.SSelect Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port foranother application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result ifthis option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, ifActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedgeor 1551/1553, an error message will result. See “Error Message”onpage232 for more information.Changing Comm SettingsTap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1 port.Current settings are restored after a warm-boot, but are lost after a cold-boot. When these settings have not been changed, the OK button is dis-abled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OK after it is enabled toaccept these changes.SBaud Rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,115200SData Bits:7or8SParity: None, Odd, Even, Mark, SpaceSStop Bits:1or2SFlow Control: None or HardwareTethered ScannerThe default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in the followingillustration:

Scanner SupportChapter —6232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered ScannerThe default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySetReset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan-ner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port con-figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels.Welch Allyn 1470 Imager SettingsThe Welch Allyn 1470 Imager can be set to this configuration by scanningthe Factory Default Settings label.Error MessageIf the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, nei-ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can beenabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this mes-sage is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to freeup the COM1 port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner.Scanner CablingA null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com-municate with the 700 Series Computer when using the 700 Series SerialCable (P/N: 226-999-001).The Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cable connects directly to the Model 700 CommPort.

6 Scanner Support—Chapter233700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualLimitations and CapabilitiesThe Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:SNo auto detection of a scanner’ s physical connection to COM1 port.User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 portmatched the settings of the device.SThe Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when controlcharacters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known PocketPC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which awork around is being developed.SCommunications port is COM1 and cannot be changed.SA complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (theinter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concate-nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, itcould be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted.Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were tobuffer the labels before transmitting them.When enabled, the Comm Port Wedge menu option has the followinglimitation:SThere is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scan-ner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboardinterface only.When enabled, the 1551/1553 menu option has the following capabilities:SGrid Data Editing is available.SThe source of the symbology configurations is only available via theEasy Set command labels. Only the Virtual Wedge configurations can beconfigured via the Data Collection Control Panel Applet Virtual Wedgepage. See Appendix A, “Control Panel Applets,” for more information.SMay transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the VirtualWedge).

$Scanner SupportChapter —6234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSThe bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to getbar code data from the bar code scanner. The following example showshow to programmatically collects bar code data:#include “IADC.h” // Linked with ITCUUID.LIB#include “ITCAdcMgmt.h” // Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.libIADC* pIADC;HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled.hrStatus =ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(“ExtScanner”), // Name of the ADC device.IID_IADC, // COM interface to returnITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD, // Device’s Flags(LPVOID *) &pIADC); // the returned interfaceif( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) ){BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];DWORD dwLength = 0;HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(byteBuffer, // Buffer to put the ADC data.MAX_LABEL_SIZE, // Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.&dwLength, // Number bytes returned.NULL, // Time stamp of the received data. NULL.INFINITE // Number of milliseconds to wait.);}when done using this COM interface, delete it:ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);$

235700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualProgramming7The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series ColorMobile Computer:SCreating CAB Files (page 236)SFTP Server (page 251)SFull Screen (page 262)SKernel I/O control functions (page 264)SReboot Functions (page 280)SRemapping the Keypad (page 281)

ProgrammingChapter —7236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCreating CAB FilesThe Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an applica-tion on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiplefiles that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into onefile provides the following benefits:SAll application files are present.SA partial installation is prevented.SThe application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktopcomputer or a Web site.Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB filefor your application.Creating Device-Specific CAB FilesDo the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, inthe order provided:1Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page 236).2Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of theinstallation process (page 248).3Use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file, using the .INF file, theoptional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files asparameters (page 249).Creating an .INF FileAn .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi-zard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:[Version]This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant informa-tion.Required? YesSSignature:“signature_name”Must be “$Windows NT$” as Windows CE is not available on Win-dows 95.SProvider:“INF_creator”The company name of the application, such as “Microsoft.”SCESignature: “$Windows CE$”EXAMPLE:[Version]Signature = “$Windows NT$”Provider = “Microsoft”CESignature = “$Windows CE$”

$Programming—Chapter 7237700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEStrings]This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the defaultinstallation directory.Required? YesSAppName:app_nameName of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INFfile will be replaced with this string value, such as RP32.SInstallDir:default_install_dirDefault installation directory on the device. Other instances of %Install-Dir% in the .INF file will be replaced with this string value. Example:\storage_card\%AppName%EXAMPLE:[CEStrings]AppName=“Game Pack”InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%[Strings]This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string keyrepresents a string of printable characters.Required? NoSstring_key:valueString consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclosevalue in double quotation marks ““”” if the corresponding string key isused in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys isokay.EXAMPLE:[Strings]reg_path = Software\Microsoft\My Test App$

ProgrammingChapter —7238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEDevice]Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this sectionare optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does notperform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms.Ifthe UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is notoverridden.Required? YesSProcessorType :processor_typeThe value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType. Forexample, the value for the SH3 CPU is 10003 and the MIPS CPU is4000.SUnsupportedPlatforms:platform_family_nameThis lists known unsupported platform family names. If the namespecified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupportedfor the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupportedplatform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupportednames. Application Manager will not display the application for anunsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setupprocess if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device.EXAMPLE:[CEDevice]UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported[CEDevice.SH3]UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupportedSVersionMin:minor_versionNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of thisdevice is greater than or equal to VersionMin.ForWindowsCEJapa-nese language devices, set this to 2.01SVersionMax:major_versionNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of thisdevice is less than or equal to VersionMax. For Windows CE Japaneselanguage devices, set this to 2.01Note: Supported Windows CE operating system versions include 1.0,1.01, 2.0, 2.01, and 2.10. When using these numbers, be sure to includeall significant digits.SBuildMin:build_numberNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of thisdevice is greater than or equal to BuildMin.SBuildMax:build_numberNumeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of thisdevice is less than or equal to BuildMax.

Programming—Chapter 7239700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEXAMPLE:The following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one thatgives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3and the MIPS microprocessors.[CEDevice] ; A “template” for all platformsUnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; Does not support pltfrm1; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only.VersionMin = 1.0VersionMax = 1.0[CEDevice.SH3] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings; This will create a .CAB file specific to SH3 devices.ProcessorType = 10003 ; SH3 .cab file is valid for SH3 microprocessors.UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking isperformed.VersionMin =VersionMax =[CEDevice.MIPS] ; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings; This will create a .CAB file specific to “MIPS” devices.ProcessorType = 4000 ; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPS microprocessor.UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2 ; pltfrm1,pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CAB file.Note: To create the two CPU-specific .CAB files for the SETUP.INF filein the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the “/cpu sh3 mips”parameter.

$ProgrammingChapter —7240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[DefaultInstall]This describes the default installation of your application. Note that underthis section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description.Required? YesSCopyfiles:copyfile_list_sectionMaps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font,and Files.Bitmaps.SAddReg:add_registry_sectionExample: RegSettings.AllSCEShortcuts:shortcut_list_sectionString that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, asdefined in the [CEShortcuts] section.SCESetupDLL:setup_DLLOptimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the In-dependent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functionsfor operations during installation and removal of the application. Thefile must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section.SCESelfRegister:self_reg_DLL_filenameString that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegister-Server and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM)functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. Duringinstallation, if installation on the device fails to call the file’ s exportedDllRegisterServer function, the file’ s exported DllUnregisterServerfunction will not be called during removal.EXAMPLE:[DefaultInstall]AddReg = RegSettings.AllCEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All[SourceDiskNames]This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap-plication resides.Required? YesSdisk_ordinal:disk_label,,path1=,“App files” , C:\Appsoft\RP32\...2=,“Font files”,,C:\RpTools\...3=,“CE Tools” ,,C:\windows ce tools...SCESignature: “$Windows CE$”Example[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section1 = ,“Common files”,,C:\app\common ; Using an absolute path[SourceDisksNames.SH3]2 = ,“SH3 files”,,sh3 ; Using a relative path[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]2 = ,“MIPS files”,,mips ; Using a relative path$

$Programming—Chapter 7241700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[SourceDiskFiles]This describes the name and path of the files in which your applicationresides.Required? YesSfilename:disk_number[,subdir]RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\...WCESTART.INI = 1RPMCE212.INI = 1TAHOMA.TTF = 2Note:[,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file.Example[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required sectionbegin.wav = 1end.wav = 1sample.hlp = 1[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]sample.exe = 2 ; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[DestinationDirs]This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for theapplication on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directoryidentifiers.Required? YesSfile_list_section:0,subdirString that identifies the destination directory. The following list showsthe string substitutions supported by Windows CE. These can be usedonly for the beginning of the path. \%CE1% \Program Files%CE2% \Windows%CE3% \My Documents%CE4% \Windows\Startup%CE5% \My Documents%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories%CE7% \Program Files\Communication%CE8% \Program Files\Games%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook%CE10% \Program Files\Office%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games%CE15% \Windows\Fonts%CE16% \Windows\Recent%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu%InstallDir%Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. Itis declared in the [CEStrings] section%AppName%Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section.Example[DestinationDirs]Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir ; \Program Files\My SubdirFiles.Shared = 0,%CE2% ; \Windows$

Programming—Chapter 7243700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CopyFiles]This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default filesto copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files werelisted that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identi-fies that mapping and may contain flags.Required? YesScopyfile_list_section:destination_filename,[source_filename]The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina-tion_filename.Scopyfile_list_section:flagsThe numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying fi-les. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE.Flag Value DescriptionCOPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error.COPYFLG_NOSKIP 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file.COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory.COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if thefile is already in the destination directory.CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer.CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file.CE_COPYFLG_SHARED 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted.Example[DefaultInstall.SH3]CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3[DefaultInstall.MIPS]CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS

$ProgrammingChapter —7244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[AddReg]This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describesthe keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Withinthe [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to thissection, such as “AddReg=RegSettings.All”. This section defines theoptions for that setting.Required? NoSadd_registry_section:registry_root_stringString that specifies the registry root location. The following list showsthe values supported by Windows CE.SHKCR Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOTSHKCU Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USERSHKLM Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINESadd_registry_section:value_nameRegistry value name. If empty, the “default” registry value name is used.Sadd_registry_section:flagsNumeric value that specifies information about the registry key. Thefollowing table shows the values that are supported by Window CE.Flag Value DescriptionFLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER 0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be usedwith any of the other flags in this table.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ 0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ 0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that followscan be a list of strings separated by commas.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY 0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that followsmust be a list of numeric values separated by commas, onebyte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix.FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD 0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in theWin32 Setup .INF documentation is supported.ExampleAddReg = RegSettings.All[RegSettings.All]HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha ; <default> = “alpha”HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3 ; Test = 3HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6 ; New\another = 6$

$Programming—Chapter 7245700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manual[CEShortCuts]This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica-tion creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a referencemay have been made to this section, such as “ShortCuts.All”. This sectiondefines the options for that setting.Required? NoSshortcut_list_section:shortcut_filenameString that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNKextension.Sshortcut_list_section:shortcut_type_flagNumeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any non-zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder.Sshortcut_list_section:target_file_pathString value that specifies the destination location. Use the target filename for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copylist. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [Destination-Dirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir,orthe%InstallDir% string.Sshortcut_list_section:standard_destination_pathOptional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%.Ifnovalue is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section orthe DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used.ExampleCEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All[Shortcuts.All]Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. SampleApp,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.Sample .INF File[Version] ; Required sectionSignature = “$Windows NT$”Provider = “Intermec Technologies Corporation”CESignature = “$Windows CE$”;[CEDevice];ProcessorType =[DefaultInstall] ; Required sectionCopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl,Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work,Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =Shortcuts.All[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section1 = ,“App files” ,,c:\appsoft\...2 = ,”Font files” ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts3 = ,”CE Tools” ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce212\6110ie\mfc\lib\x86[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required sectionrpm.exe = 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce212\WCEX86Rel6110wcestart.ini = 1$

$ProgrammingChapter —7246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manualrpmce212.ini = 1intermec.bmp = 1rpmlogo.bmp = 1rpmname.bmp = 1import.bmp = 1export.bmp = 1clock.bmp = 1printer.bmp = 1filecopy.bmp = 1readme.txt = 1lang_eng.bin = 1rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1tahoma.ttf = 2mfcce212.dll = 3olece212.dll = 3olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce211\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce212\wcex86relpicfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce211\wcex86relpsink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependencypslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependencynpcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04[DestinationDirs] ; Required section;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\DesktopFiles.App = 0,%InstallDir%Files.DataBase = 0,%InstallDir%\DataBaseFiles.BitMaps = 0,%InstallDir%\BitmapsFiles.Fonts = 0,%InstallDir%\FontsFiles.Intl = 0,%InstallDir%\IntlFiles.TelecomNcsCE = 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCEFiles.Windows = 0,%InstallDir%\WindowsFiles.Import = 0,%InstallDir%\ImportFiles.Export = 0,%InstallDir%\ExportFiles.Work = 0,%InstallDir%\WorkFiles.WinCE = 0,\storage_card\wince[CEStrings] ; Required sectionAppName = Rp32InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%[Strings] ; Optional section;[Shortcuts.All];Sample App,0,sample.exe ; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir% ; The path is explicitly specified.[Files.App]rpm.exe,,,0rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0mfcce212.dll,,,0olece212.dll,,,0olece211.dll,,,0rdm45wce.dll,,,0picfmt.dll,,,0$

$Programming—Chapter 7247700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s Manualfmtctrl.dll,,,0ugrid.dll,,,0simple.dll,,,0psink.dll,,,0pslpwce.dll,,,0npcpport.dll,,,0;dexcom.dll,,,0[Files.DataBase]rpmdata.dbd,,,0[Files.Fonts]tahoma.ttf,,,0[Files.BitMaps]intermec.bmp,,,0rpmlogo.bmp,,,0rpmname.bmp,,,0import.bmp,,,0export.bmp,,,0clock.bmp,,,0printer.bmp,,,0filecopy.bmp,,,0[Files.Intl]lang_eng.bin,,,0[Files.TelecomNcsCE]ncsce.exe,,,0nrinet.dll,,,0[Files.Windows]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Import]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Export]readme.txt,,,0[Files.Work]readme.txt,,,0[Files.WinCE]wcestart.ini,,,0[RegSettings.All]HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide”,,0x00010001,1; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop”,,0x00010001,0; Shell is not on top HKLM,”SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock”,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0; Clock is not on taskbar$

$ProgrammingChapter —7248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUsing Installation Functions in SETUP.DLLSETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera-tions during installation and removal of your application. The followinglist shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL.SInstall_InitCalled before installation begins. Use this function to check the applica-tion version when reinstalling an application and to determine if a de-pendent application is present.SInstall_ExitCalled after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errorsthat occur during application installation.SUninstall_InitCalled before the removal process begins. Use this function to close theapplication, if the application is running.SUninstall_ExitCalled after the removal process is complete. Use this function to savedatabase information to a file and delete the database and to tell the userwhere the user data files are stored and how to reinstall the application.Note;Use[DefaultInstall] →CESelfRegister (page 240) in the .INF fileto point to SETUP.DLL.After the CAB File ExtractionCab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need tocreate the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the “\Windows” directory.The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion ofthe SETUP.DLL file. It looks like this:BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE hModule, DWORD ul_reason_for_call, LPVOIDlpReserved ){switch (ul_reason_for_call){case DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH:break;case DLL_THREAD_ATTACH:break;case DLL_THREAD_DETACH:break;case DLL_PROCESS_DETACH:if (bInstallSuccessful) {HANDLE h;h = CreateFile(L”\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt”,GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS,FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL);if (h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE)CloseHandle(h);}break;}return TRUE;}$

$Programming—Chapter 7249700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe system software looks for the following directory structure and files onthe installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embeddedflash file system. No other folders need exist.\2577\autorun.exe\2577\autorun.dat\2577\autocab.exe\2577\autocab.dat\cabfiles\*.cabCreating CAB Files with CAB WizardAfter you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use theCAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for theCAB Wizard is as follows:cabwiz.exe “inf_file” [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type[cpu_type]]A batch file, located in <program> directory, with the following com-mands, works well:cd\“Windows CE Tools”\WCE211\”MS HPC Pro”\support\appinst\bincabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\<program>\<inf_file_name>cd \appsoft\<program>S“inf_file”The SETUP.INF file path.Sdest_directoryThe destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified,the .CAB files are created in the “inf_file” directory.Serror_fileThe file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that areencountered when the .CAB files are compiled. If no file name is speci-fied, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a file name is used, theCAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for au-tomated builds.Scpu_typeCreates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag. A micropro-cessor tag is a label used in the Win32 SETUP.INF file to differentiatebetween different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, followed bymultiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line.ExampleThis example creates .CAB files for the SH3 and MIPS microprocessors,assuming that the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the SH3 and MIPStags:cabwiz.exe “c:\myfile.inf” /err myfile.err /cpu sh3 mipsNote: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (WindowsCE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in thesame directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its fullpath for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly.$

ProgrammingChapter —7250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTroubleshooting the CAB WizardTo identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CABWizard, follow these guidelines:SUse %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character inan .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will notwork under the [Strings] section.SDo not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap-plications on Windows-based desktop platforms.SEnsure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included withWindows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE.SUse the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE.SDo not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included withWindows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which uses MAKE-CAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE.SDo not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files.

Programming—Chapter 7251700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualFTP ServerFTP support is provided through the FTP Server applicationFTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part thebase system.FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. Theserver can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a “network announce-ment” to notify prospective clients of server availability.Synopsisftpdce [options ]OptionsS-AaddrSets the single target address to which to send the network announce-ment. Default is broadcast.S-BbyteSets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slowerlinks. Default is 65536.S-CnameSets the device name. Used by Intermec management software.S-FvalueDisables the default Intermec account. A value of “0” disables the ac-count. Default is “1”.Note: Disabling the default account without providing a working accesscontrol list on the server will result in a device that will not accept anyFTP connections.S-HsecSets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of“0” turns the network announcement off. Default is 30 seconds.S-IipSets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional).S-LlogSets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled).S-NsecSpecifies the number of seconds to wait before starting FTP server ser-vices.S-PportSets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent.Default port is 52401.S-QportSets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections.Default port is 21.

$ProgrammingChapter —7252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualS-RdirSets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the rootdirectoryof the drive from which the FTP Server program was executed.S-TscriptSets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process.S-UurlSets the default URL for this device.S-Z“parms”Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement.Configurable Parameters Via the Registry EditorThe following parameters receive default values during the installation ofthe Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visiblein the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify thedefault behavior of the FTP server.BlockSizeSetting this parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and re-ceive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, theFTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjust-ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes.Valid Range0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal).Default65536$

$Programming—Chapter 7253700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualDeviceNameThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to include the specifieddevice name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement (IDNA).Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name to thisdevice for asset tracking.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_SZValid RangeNone.DefaultNone.DeviceURLThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specifiedURL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management softwarefor asset management.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_SZValid RangeNone.DefaultNone.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIDNATargetThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA to aspecific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parameter isuseful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed be-tween subnets. The use of this parameter will restrict the reception of theIDNA to the target destination only.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_SZValid RangeNone.DefaultNone.ManifestNameThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specifiedmanifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec 6920Communications Server for communication transactions. See the 6920Communications Server documentation for proper use of this parameter.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_SZValid RangeNone.Defaultiftp.ini$

$Programming—Chapter 7255700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPauseAtStartupThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the specifiednumber of seconds before making the FTP service available on the device.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_DWORD - stored in seconds.Valid RangeNone.Default0RootThis parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the FTPmount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an existingdirectory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server.KeyHKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTPValue TypeREG_SZValid RangeNone.Default\$

ProgrammingChapter —7256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTransferring Files Over TCP/IP NetworksThe File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP net-works. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display awindow, but can run in the background.FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. Theserver can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-vicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a “network an-nouncement” to notify prospective clients of server availability.RemarksThe FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:SCDUPChanges to the parent directory of the current working directory.SCWDChanges working directory.SDELEDeletes a file.SHELPGives help information.SLIST (This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command).Gives list files in a directory.SMKDMakes a directory.SMODE (Always Uses Binary).Specifies data transfer mode.SNLSTGives a name list of files in directory (this FTP request is the same asthe ls command).SNOOPDoes nothing.SPASSSpecifies a password.SPWDPrints the current working directory.SQUITTerminates session.SRETRRetrieves a file.SRMDRemoves a directory.SRNFRSpecifies rename-from file name.

Programming—Chapter 7257700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSRNTOSpecifies rename-to file name.SSTORStores a file.SSYSTShows the operating system type of server system.STYPE (Binary transfers only.)Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter.SUSERSpecifies user name.SXCUP (Not Normally Used)Changes the parent directory of the current working directory.SXCWD (Not Normally Used)Changes the current directory.SXMKD (Not Normally Used)Creates a directory.SXPWD (Not Normally Used)Prints the current working directory.SXRMD (Not Normally Used)Removes a directory.SSITEThe following nonstandard or operating system (OS)-specific com-mands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP clients,you can send site commands by preceding the command with “quote”such as “quote site status.”SATTRIBGets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB)Usage:QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R |-R][+A |-A ][+S |-S][+H |-H][[path]filename]+Sets an attribute.`Clears an attribute.RRead-only file attribute.AArchive file attribute.SSystem file attribute.HHidden file attribute.To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server re-sponse will be: 200-AD SHRCEIX filenameIf the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in additionto the values defined above, there is also defined:CCompressed file attribute.EEncrypted file attribute.IINROM file attribute.XXIP file attribute (execute in ROM, not shadowed in RAM).

$ProgrammingChapter —7258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSBOOTReboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the serv-er is executing to reboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly be-fore reboot. All client connections will be terminated. Cold boot isdefault except for the PocketPC build in which the default is warmboot.(SITE BOOT)Usage:QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM |COLD]SCOPYCopies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY)Usage:QUOTE SITE COPY [source][destination]ExampleQUOTE SITE COPY ‘\Storage Card\one.dat’ ‘\StorageCard\two.dat’SEXITExits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Serverthus terminating all client connections. (SITE EXIT)Usage:QUOTE SITE EXITSHELPGives site command help information. (SITE HELP)Usage:QUOTE SITE HELP [command]SKILLTerminates a running program. (SITE KILL)Usage:QUOTE SITE KILL [program |pid]SLOGOpens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG)Usage:QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]SPLISTLists the running processes (not supported on all platforms).(SITE PLIST)Usage:QUOTE SITE PLISTSRUNStarts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path orfilename, wrapping the name with single quotes is required.Usage:QUOTE SITE RUN [program]ExampleQUOTE SITE RUN ‘\Storage Card\app.exe’$

Programming—Chapter 7259700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSSTATUSReturns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number,model, IP address, network announcement information as well as OSmemory usage are returned. (SITE STATUS)Usage:QUOTE SITE STATUSSTIMEOUTToggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes).If this timer expires with no activity between the client and the server,the client connection will be disconnected. If the optional secondsargument is supplied, the server will set the connection timeout tothe number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2 minutes.(SITE TIMEOUT)Usage:QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but notimplemented.The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows theversion number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial num-ber and OS of the machine hosting the server.The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoftweb browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environ-ment.The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands that can be used fromthe web browser.SClick EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command.SClick REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command.SUse the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server executethese commands.SSecurity:A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the700 Series Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict accessvia the FTP Server to the users they wish. This is in addition to thedefault Intermec account which can be disabled using the -F0 optionat runtime.The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in thesame directory on the 700 Series Computer as the FTPDCE.EXEserver. The FTP Server will encrypt this file to keep the informationsafe from unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTPServer is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Series Computerafter the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server totake effect.The format of the FTPDCE.TXT is as follows:FTPDCE:user1!passwd1<cr><lf>user2!passwd2<cr><lf>user3!passwd3<cr><lf>...

$Programming—Chapter 7261700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualThe default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the followingregistry entry is defined and set to “0” which disables AutoFTP. “1” enablesthe AutoFTP. The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu byselecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off.HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTPThese new entries are located below the selections to load the networkdrivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server isloaded by default, to provide “out-of-the-box” capability for customerswho want to begin loading files to the 700 Series Computer without anyprior configuration.Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu,and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped.On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it isstopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE-TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature. To do an AutoFTPInstallation Check:1Ensure the FTP Server is running “out-of-the-box” the first time.2Tap Start →Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antennaicon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirmthe FTP Server is not running.3Tap Start →Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antennaicon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu.Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot and confirm it isrunning.4Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and confirmthat it is not running any more.5Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume.The server should still be running, but the FTP connection to the clientshould be dropped.$

Programming—Chapter 7263700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualShould you want your 700 Series Computer to display a full screen, keepin mind that your computer is Pocket-PC certified by Microsoft Corpora-tion. Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC, using thefollowing links. These instructions give full instructions on how to displayfull screen.SInstructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC++ ap-plications using an SHFullScreen() API:http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q266/2/44.ASPSInstructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applica-tions also using the SHFullScreen() API:http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q265/4/51.ASP

$ProgrammingChapter —7264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKernel I/O ControlsThis describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to applicationprogrammers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the functionas the following to avoid link and compile errors.extern “C” BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORDnInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFOThis IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORMname based on an input value.SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOIDlpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORDnOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Points to a DWORD containing either theSPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFOvalue.lpInBufSize Must be set to sizeof(DWORD).lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the returndata of the function. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE isspecified in lpInBuf, then the “PocketPC\0” Unicodestring is returned. If SPI_GETOEMINFO is specified inlpInBuf, then the “Intermec 700\0” Unicode string isreturned.nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough tohold the string returned.lpBytesReturned The actual number of bytes returned by the function forthe data requested.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

$Programming—Chapter 7265700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARMUsage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Points to this structure. See “ID Field Values”below.struct PARMS {BYTE id;BYTE ClassId;};nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the returndata of the function. If this field is set to NULL andnOutBufSize is set to zero when the function is called thefunction will return the number bytes required by thebuffer.nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function for thedata requested.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. EitherERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER orERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this functionis used to get the error.ID Field ValuesThe id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:SITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_IDThis IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11 MAC Address. Six bytes arereturned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUMThis IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format.Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-rameter.SITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATEThis IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in theBCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the bufferpointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.$

ProgrammingChapter —7266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATEThis IOCTL returns the device’ s date of last service in BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to bythe lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPEThis IOCTL returns the device’ s display type. One byte is returned inthe buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_EDG_IPThis IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytesare returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNETThis IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four by-tes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_ECNThis IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format.Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-rameter.SITC_NVPARM_CONTRASTThis IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes arereturned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_MCODEThis IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the de-vice. Sixteen bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOut-Buffer parameter.SITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBERThis IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system compo-nents. These values for the ClassId field of the PARMS structure are al-lowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the idfield:SVN_CLASS_KBDReturns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains anASCII value which represents the keyboard microprocessor version inthe system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating nullcharacter.SVN_CLASS_ASICReturns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains anASCII value which represents the version of the FPGA firmware inthe system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating nullcharacter.SVN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAPReturns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains anASCII value which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loaderfirmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a termi-nating null character.

Programming—Chapter 7267700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENTThis IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatiledata store that dictates certain software parameters. A BOOLEANDWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-cates if Intermec Content is enabled in the XIP regions. TRUE indicatesthat it is enabled. FALSE indicates that it is not enabled.SITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITYThis IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEANDWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-cates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it isinstalled. FALSE indicates that it is not installed.SITC_NVPARM_WAN_RIThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOL-EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer thatindicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates activehigh. FALSE indicates active low.SITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTOREThis IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the RTC will be restored upon a cold boot.FALSE indicates that the RTC will not be restored.SITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SWThis IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag.A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOut-Buffer that indicates the data collection software is to be installed at boottime. FALSE indicates the data collection software should not beinstalled.SITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HWThis IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is re-turned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type ofdata collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value re-turned is ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX.SITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONENo scanner hardware is installed.SITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGEROEM 2D imager is installed.SITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGERIntermec 2D imager is installed.SITC_DEVID_SE900_LASERSE900 laser is installed.SITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASERSE900HS laser is installed.The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. Thebit mask for this is ITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero val-ue indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed.

ProgrammingChapter —7268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOL-EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer.TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates thatno WAN radio is installed.SITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCYThis IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States.FALSE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is European.SITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPEThis IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. ABYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer which indi-cates the type of WAN radio hardware installed. The maximum possiblevalue returned is ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current defi-nitions are:SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONENo WAN radio installed.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555CDMA Sierra Wireless radio.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio.SITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45GSM/GPRS Siemens radio.SITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b radio installed flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b radio is installed. FALSE indicatesthat no 802.11b radio is installed.SITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPEThis IOCTL reads the 802.11b radio ID installed by manufacturing. ABYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicatesthe type of 802.11b radio hardware installed. The maximum possiblevalue returned is ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current defi-nitions are:SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONENo 802.11b radio installed.SITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011BIntel 2011B radio installed.SITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indi-cates that no Bluetooth radio is installed.

Programming—Chapter 7269700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installedflag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to bylpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSEindicates that no serial 2 device is installed.SITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicatesthat no vibrate device is installed.SITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. ABOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-fer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indi-cates that no Ethernet device is installed.SITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardwareinstalled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointedto by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hard-ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection hardwareis installed.SITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLEDThis IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection softwareinstalled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointedto by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection soft-ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection softwareis installed.

ProgrammingChapter —7270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARMDescribes and enables the registry save location.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORDnOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf A single byte that may be one of the id values.See “ID Field Values”below.nInBufSize Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data tobe written to the non-volatile data store.nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. EitherERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER orERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this functionis used to get the error.ID Field ValuesThe id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:SITC_REGISTRY_LOCATIONThis IOCTL sets the default location for where to write the registrywhen RegFlushKey() is called by an application. The registry may besaved to Flash, a CompactFlash storage card or a SecureDigital storagecard. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of “1”for the CompactFlash card or “2” for the SecureDigital card to specifythe location.SITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLEThis function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile mediafeature of the RegFlushKey() function. lpOutBuf must be set to zero(FALSE) if the feature is to be disabled or one (TRUE) if the feature isto be enabled.SITC_ DOCK_SWITCHThis IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch maybe set to either “modem” or “serial” positions. lpOutBuf must point to abuffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM orDOCK_SERIAL as defined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies theposition the switch is to be set.

Programming—Chapter 7271700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSITC_ WAKEUP_MASKThis IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five pro-grammable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not a programmable wakeupkey. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys areset to disable key wakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup forthat key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key. lpOutBufmust point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask con-sisting of the OR’ ed constants as defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Only thefollowing keys are programmable as wakeup events.#define SCANNER_TRIGGER 1#define SCANNER_LEFT 2#define SCANNER_RIGHT 4#define GOLD_A1 8#define GOLD_A2 0x10SITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARDThis IOCTL sets the threshold for the keyboard ambient sensor. Thiscan be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255 (always on). lpOutBuf mustpoint to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.SITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHTThis IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. Thiscan be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255. lpOutBuf must point to abuffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting.

ProgrammingChapter —7272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEIDThis IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDs sup-ported, which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer. TheUUID is returned if the buffer size is set to sizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID),otherwise the oldstyle device ID is returned.Usage#include “pkfuncs.h”#include “deviceid.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are notsupported.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure asdefined by DEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returned.nOutBufSize The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if theUUID is to be returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined byPKFUNCS.H is returned if the size in bytes is greaterthan or equal to sizeof(DEVICE_ID).lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

$Programming—Chapter 7273700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFOReturns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined byOEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:Scboemverinfo sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);Sverinfover 1Ssig; “ITC\0”Sid; ‘N’Stgtcustomer “”Stgtplat SeaRayStgtplatversion Current build version numberStgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”Stgtcpu “PXA250\0”;Stgtcoreversion “”Sdate Build timeStime Build datenOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO).Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

$ProgrammingChapter —7274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFOReturns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined byOEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:Scboemverinfo Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);Sverinfover 1Ssig; “ITC\0”Sid; ‘B’Stgtcustomer “”Stgtplat SeaRayStgtplatversion Current build version number ofthe bootstrap loaderStgtcputype[8]; “Intel\0”;Stgtcpu “PXA250\0”Stgtcoreversion “”Sdate Build timeStime Build datenOutBufSize The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

Programming—Chapter 7275700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOTCauses the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOTCauses the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.

$ProgrammingChapter —7276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFOThis IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent re-set.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure:typedef struct {DWORD ResetReason; // most recent reset typeDWORD ObjectStoreState; // state of object store} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;// Reset reason types#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE 1 // cold#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE 2 // suspend#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG 4#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT 8 // power fail#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT 16 // warm boot// Object store state flags#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR 1nOutBufSize The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes.lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

Programming—Chapter 7277700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICEThis IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD(4 bytes) that contains the boot device. The followingboot devices are supported:#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN 0#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP 1#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM 2#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA 3#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA 5#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI 6nOutBufSize The size of lpOutBuf in bytes (4).lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function.Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.

ProgrammingChapter —7278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_HAL_REBOOTCauses the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORDnInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORDlpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be zero.Return ValuesNone.

$Programming—Chapter 7279700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATIONReturns processor information.Usage#include “pkfuncs.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOIDlpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORDnOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );ParametersParameters:lpInBuf Should be set to NULL.lpInBufSize Should be set to zero.lpOutBuf Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFOstructure. The PROCESSOR_INFO structure storesinformation that describes the CPU more descriptively.typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {WORD wVersion; // Set to value 1WCHAR szProcessorCore[40]; // “ARM\0”WORD wCoreRevision; // 4WCHAR szProcessorName[40]; // “PXA250\0”WORD wProcessorRevision; // 0WCAHR szCatalogNumber[100]; // 0WCHAR szVendor[100]; // “Intel Corporation\0”DWORD dwInstructionSet; // 0DWORD dwClockSpeed; // 400}nOutBufSize Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.$

ProgrammingChapter —7280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualIOCTL_GET_CPU_IDReturns Xscale processor ID.Usage#include “oemioctl.h”SyntaxBOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORDnInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORDlpBytesReturned );ParameterslpInBuf Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined inOEMIOCTL.H.lpInBufSize Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo).lpOutBuf Should be NULL.nOutBufSize Should be set to 0.lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);Return ValuesReturns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails.GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value.Reboot FunctionsThere are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an ap-plication program can use to force the 700 Series Computer to reboot.IOCTL_HAL_REBOOTIOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 278.IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOTInvoking the KernelIOControl function withIOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700Series Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up had beenperformed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store arediscarded. See page 275.IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOTThis function is supported on the 700 Series Computers. It performs awarm boot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 275.

Programming—Chapter 7281700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualRemapping the KeypadNote; Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping mayrender the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Series Computer couldalso be lost, should any problems occur.Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Keypad. Thiswill allow applications to enable keys that would otherwise not be availa-ble, such as the [F1] function key. Also, to disable keys that should not beavailable, such as the alpha key because no alpha entry is required. Careshould be exercised when attempting to remap the keypad because im-proper remapping may cause the keypad to become unusable. This can becorrected by cold booting the device which will cause the default keymapto be loaded again.Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for theentire system, not just for the application that does the remapping.There are three “planes” supported for the 740 Keypad. Keys that are to beused in more than one shift plane must be described in each plane.Unshifted PlaneThe unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressedwith other keys, such as the following:S[1] 1S[5] 5S[9] 9Gold PlaneThe gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta-neously pressed with the [Gold] key, such as the following:S[Gold] +[1] SendS[Gold] +[5] A3S[Gold] +[9] PageDownAlpha PlaneThe alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad hasbeen placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key, such as the fol-lowing:S[Alpha] +[1] CapsS[Alpha] +[5] JKLS[Alpha] +[9] WXYZ

$ProgrammingChapter —7282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKey ValuesKey values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with adefault key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wishto change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from theregistry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then writethe updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be donewith standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(), RegQuery-ValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx().SThe unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeySThe gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGoldSThe alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlphaHow Key Values Are Stored in RegistryTo know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what ScanCodes are assigned to each physical key (see the table below). The ScanCode is used at the lowest level of the system to let the keypad driver knowwhich physical key has been pressed. The keypad driver takes that scancode and looks it up in a table (a copy of the one stored in the registry) todetermine which values to pass on to the operating system.Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver whatvalue needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexedby the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshiftedplane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventhword under the “Vkey” registry key will have the value for the [4] key.Taking a sample of the “Vkey” registry key shows the following values:00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. . .The value is 34,00. The values are in reverse byte order because that is theway the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothingneeds to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically whenthe data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to beaware of this when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see thatthe value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Look-ing that up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a “4”.If you wanted the key, labeled “4”, to output the letter “A” instead, youwould need to change the seventh word to “41” (the hexadecimal represen-tation of “A” from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back into theregistry.Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remap-ping these scan codes could render your 700 Series Computer unusableuntil a cold-boot is performed.If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00.$

Programming—Chapter 7283700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualChange NotificationJust changing the registry keys will not immediately change the keymappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated,signal the “ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE” named event using theCreateEvent() API.Advanced Keypad RemappingIt is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to mapnamed system events to a button. The multiple key press option could beuseful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa-tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events toa button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner,control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If youneed help performing one of these advanced topics please contact IntermecTechnical Support.Scan CodesAt the lowest driver level, the 740 Keypad identifies keys as scan codes.These scan codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot bechanged without modifying the keypad firmware.Key/Meaning ScancodeReserved 0x00I/O Button 0x01Scanner Trigger 0x02Scanner Left 0x03Scanner Right 0x04.0x0540x06None 0x07Left Arrow 0x08None 0x09Backspace 0x0AGold Key 0x0BNone 0x0CESC 0x0DDown Arrow 0x0E10x0F70x10Alpha Key 0x11None 0x12Up Arrow 0x13Right Arrow 0x1420x1580x1600x1750x18None 0x19

$ProgrammingChapter —7284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualKey/Meaning ScancodeAction Key 0x1A30x1B90x1CENTER 0x1D60x1ENone 0x1F-0x40Charge Detect 0x41LCD Frontlight 0x42Ambient Light 0x42Threshold Crossed 0x42Headset Detected 0x43Keypad Backlight 0x44Ambient Light 0x44Threshold Crossed 0x44Sample View of Registry KeysThe following is a sample view of the current default key mapping. See theregistry on your device for the latest key mappings.[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]”ResumeMask”=dword:7”Vkey”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05”VkeyGold”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05”VkeyAlpha”=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05$

285700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualControl Panel AppletsAThis appendix contains information about the Data Collection, SNMP,and User Information Control Panel applets that may be on your 700 Se-ries Color Mobile Computer.SNMP and Data Collection settings that can appear under Settings aredependent on what hardware configuration is done for each 700 SeriesComputer at the time of shipment. These settings will currently only ap-pear if a scanner or an imager option is present.Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the802.11b radio module will appear when a 802.11b radio module isinstalled in a 700 Series Computer. Control panel applets that are specificfor Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, and GSM/GPRS radio moduleswill only appear when each respective hardware configuration is done onthe 700 Series Computer. See Chapter 4, “Network Support,” for more infor-mation about the radio modules or the wireless printing.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualConfiguration ParametersA configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Series Color (700C)Mobile Computer operates, such as configuring a parameter to have the700 Series Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Useany of the following methods to execute configuration parameters:SChange Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap-plets later in this appendix.SAccess the 700 Series Computer via the Unit Manager through a webbrowser on your desktop PC via the SRDEVMGMT.CAB file. To usethe Unit Manager, install this CAB file from the 700 Color SoftwareTools CD-ROM. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consultyour Intermec sales representative.SSend parameters from an SNMP management station. See “SNMP Con-figuration” starting on page 123.SScan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft-ware from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configurationlabels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and datatransfer settings.Changing a Parameter SettingMenus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll barsto go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter set-tings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its sub-parameters.Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default settingor current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter toselect that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from aSymbologies parameter.STyping a new value in an entry field.SChoosing a new value from the drop-down list.SSelecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet.STap Defaults, then Apply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yeswhen you are prompted to verify this action.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A287700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSTap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you areprompted to verify this action.About Configuration ParametersYou can find the following information about each configuration parame-ter:SName and Purpose:Describes the parameter and its function.SAction:Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected.SSNMP OID:Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter.SSyntax or Options:Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter isconfigurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through anetwork. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para-meter. Default settings are noted in italic.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData Collection Control Panel AppletSee “Scanner Control and Data Transfer”intheIntermec Windows CE/PocketPC Software Developer’ s Kit (SDK) User’ s Manual shipped with the Soft-ware Developer’ s Kit (SDK) for information about data collection func-tions.Note: Icons are shown to the left.To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom ofthe control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-resent the following groups of settings or parameters:SSymbologiesSSymbology Options (starting on page 309)SBeeper/LED (starting on page 317)SImager (starting on page 323)SVirtual Wedge (starting on page 325)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A289700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbologiesYou can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 SeriesComputer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The followingparameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about themore common bar code symbologies are in Appendix C, “Bar CodeSymbologies.” Note that these parameters are listed in the order of theirappearance within this tab.Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scannertools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 300), MicroPDF 417 (page 302), Matrix 2 of 5 (page 304), Telepen (page 305),andCode 11 (page 306) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when usinga laser scanner, the QR Code (page 307) and Data Matrix (page 308)symbologies are not supported.The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-ther by an imager or by a laser scanner.Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser ScannerCode 39 XXInterleaved 2 of 5 X XStandard 2 of 5 XXMatrix 2 of 5 XCode 128 XXCode 93 X XCodabar XXMSI XPlessey XUPC X XEAN/EAN 128 XXCode 11 XPDF 417 XXMicro PDF 417 XTelepen XData Matrix XQR Code X

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 39Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The char-acter set is uppercase A-Z, 0-9, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), percent(%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-).ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to be changed,then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from thedrop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active1 Active (default)Format 0 Standard 43 characters (default)1 Full ASCIIStart/Stop 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedStart/Stop characters (Not supported when using an imager):0 $ (dollar sign) only1 * (asterisk) only (default)2 & and * (dollar sign and asterisk)Check digit 0 Not used (default)1 Mod 43 transmitted2 Mod 43 not transmitted3 French CIP transmitted4 French CIP not transmitted5 Italian CPI transmitted6 Italian CPI not transmittedBar code length 0 Any length (default)1 Minimum lengthMinimum length 000-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A291700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualStandard 2 of 5Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the barsto encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars.ActionTap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveFormat 0 Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default)1 Computer Identics, 4 start/stopCheck digit 0 Not used (default)1 Mod 10 transmitted2 Mod 10 not transmittedBar code length 0 Any length1 Minimum length (default)2 Fixed lengthsMinimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)Fixed length 1 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)Fixed length 2 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)Fixed length 3 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCodabarCodabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology.ActionTap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed,then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveStart/Stop 0 Not transmitted (default)1 abcd transmitted2 ABCD transmitted3 abcd/tn*e transmitted4 DC1`DC4 transmittedCLSI library system (Not supported when using an imager):0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCheck digit 0 Not used (default)1 Transmitted2 Not transmittedBar code length 0 Any length1 Minimum length (default)2 Fixed lengthsMinimum length 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6)Fixed length 1 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)Fixed length 2 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)Fixed length 3 000-254 Fixed length 0-254 (0)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2”thenFixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A293700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualUPC/EANUPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that usefour element widths.ActionTap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then select an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1OptionsUPC A 0 Not active1 Active (default)UPC E 0 Not active1 Active (default)EAN 8 0 Not active1 Active (default)EAN 13 0 Not active1 Active (default)Add-on digits 0 Not required (default)1 RequiredAdd-on 2 digits 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveAdd-on 5 digits (Not supported when using an imager):0 Not active (default)1 ActiveUPC A check digit 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)UPC E check digit 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)EAN 8 check digit 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)EAN 13 check digit 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)UPC A number system 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)UPC E number system 0 Not transmitted1 Transmitted (default)UPC A re-encoding 0 UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default)1 UPC A transmitted as UPC AUPC E re-encoding 0 UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default)1 UPC E transmitted as UPC AEAN 8 re-encoding 0 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default)1 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 93Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four elementwidths.ActionTap t he Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parametersetting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1Options0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCode 93 LengthSets the Code 93 bar code length.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand theCode 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap anoption to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1OptionsBar code length 0 Any length (default)1 Minimum lengthMinimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A295700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumericsymbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extendedASCII character set.ActionTap t he Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-ter setting. The following illustration is for a 700 Series Computer using a la-ser scanner.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1Options0 Not active (default)1 Active

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128 OptionsSet the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you usean imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, thenselect an option to change this setting.SNMP OIDNone.OptionsEAN 128 ]C1 Identifier (disabled when using an imager)0Remove1 Include (default)CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical (disabled when using an imager)0 Not active (default)1 ActiveBar code length 0 Any length (default)1 Minimum lengthMinimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

$Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A297700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 128 FNC1 CharacterThe Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII char-acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fieldsare concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager withyour 700 Series Computer.Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntaxwhere HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.\xHHFor example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would beentered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their own iden-tifiers:SBEL \aSBS \bSFF \fSLF \nSCR \rSHT \tSVT \vActionTap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII charac-ters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1OptionsAny ASCII character (default is the GS function character - ID hex)$

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPlesseyPlessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. Itincludes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit,and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. Youneed to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and CheckDigit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Series Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed,then select an option to change this setting or select an option from thedrop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCheck digit 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedBar code length 0 Any length (default)1 Minimum lengthMinimum length 001-254 Minimum bar code length 1-254 (6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A299700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMSIMSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 298) that includes a startpattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed,then select an option to change this setting or select an option from thedrop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCheck digit 0 Mod 10 transmitted (default)1 Mod 10 Not transmitted2 Double Mod 10 transmitted3 Double Mod 10 not transmittedBar code length 0 Any length1 Minimum length (default)Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPDF 417PDF 417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the abilityto scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, rowidentifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and fourspaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data.Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, thesize of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF 417 labels of morethan 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the key-pad buffer.ActionTap t he PDF 417 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-ter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter orthe Micro PDF 417 parameter.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1Options0 Not active1 Active (default)Macro PDF optionsMacro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF 417label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Series Computer.SSelect Buffered to store a multi-label PDF 417 message in the Sabrebuffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels have beenread.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A301700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSSelect Unbuffered for multi-label PDF 417 messages that are too longfor the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF 417 labelis transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemblethe message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with eachlabel. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is alwaystransmitted with unbuffered option.ActionTap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the MacroPDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option tochange this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1OptionsMacro PDF 0 Unbuffered1 Buffered (default)Control header 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedFile name 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedSegment count 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedTime stamp 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedSender 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedAddressee 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedFile size 0 Not transmitted (default)1 TransmittedChecksum 0 Not transmitted (default)1 Transmitted

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMicro PDF 417Micro PDF 417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely basedon PDF 417 (page 300). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, to-gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the MicroPDF 417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an optionto change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCode 128 Emulation 0 Not active (default)1 Active

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A303700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualInterleaved 2 of 5Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous,numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the auto-mobile industry.Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characterslong for the 700 Series Computer to scan and decode correctly.ActionTap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCheck digit 0 Not used (default)1 Mod 10 transmitted2 Mod 10 not transmitted3 French CIP transmitted4 French CIP not transmittedBar code length 0 Any length1 Minimum length (default)2 Fixed lengthsMinimum length 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6)Fixed length 1 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)Fixed length 2 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)Fixed length 3 003-254 Fixed length 3-254 (0)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered. If Barcode length =“2” then Fixed length 1,Fixed length 2,orFixed length 3 isentered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A304 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualMatrix2of5Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available whenyou use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveBar code length 0 Any length1 Minimum length (default)Minimum length 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)Note:IfBar code length =“1”thenMinimum length is entered.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A305700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualTelepenTelepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Note thatthis is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed,then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveFormat 0 ASCII (default)1 Numeric

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 11Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensivelyused in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-puter.ActionTap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to be changed,then tap an option to change this setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active (default)1 ActiveCheck digit verification 1 1 digit (default)2 2 digitsCheck digit transmit 0 Disable (default)1 Enable

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A307700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualQR CodeQR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbologycontaining dark and light square data modules. It has position detectionpatterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of theJapanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection.Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Se-ries Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active1 Active (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualData MatrixA two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modulesarranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes ErrorChecking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for dataerror recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the da-ta. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capac-ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte charac-ters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use alaser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to bechanged, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option fromthe drop-down list.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1OptionsDecoding 0 Not active1 Active (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A309700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSymbology OptionsTo access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, thentap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for barcode symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of theirappearance within the Symbology Options tab.Symbology IDIdentifies the bar code symbology in which data has been encoded by pre-pending a user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prependone of these types of character strings to identify the symbology:SUser-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You canassign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Notethat this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 SeriesComputer.SAIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 - Required to define symbology IDs):The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates thesymbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard formore information.ActionSelect Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter set-ting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any ofthe user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screenof the Code 39 user ID.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1Options0 Disable (default)1 User defined (disabled when using an imager)2 ISO/IEC Standard

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A310 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 39 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Code 128 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Codabar User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A311700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 93 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).Interleaved 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that thisis not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L).PDF-417 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify PDF 417 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF 417 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).MSI User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not avail-able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPlessey User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is not avail-able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.Standard 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this isnot available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of5userIDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.UPC A User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar codedata. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is A.UPC E User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is E.

$Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A313700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualEAN 8 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 user IDparameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF.EAN 13 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) barcode data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is F.Matrix 2 of 5 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this isnot available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parametersetting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is D.Telepen User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*).$

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A314 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualCode 11 User IDIf “1” was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your ownASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is notavailable when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 userID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting.SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1Options: xwhere xis a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A315700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPrefixPrepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.ActionTap t he Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1OptionsAcceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters.Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed.Default is no characters (disabled).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualSuffixAppends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data.ActionTap t he Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parame-ter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1OptionsAcceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL>) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A317700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper/LEDTo access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap thistab to access its parameters.Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The followingtable shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a laserscanner.Beeper Function Imager Laser ScannerBeeper Volume XXBeeper Frequency XGood Read Beeps XGood Read Beep Duration XThe following are parameters for features on the 700 Series Computer.Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper VolumeSets the volume for the good read beep.ActionTap t he Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change this pa-rameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1Laser Scanner Options0Low1High(default)2 Medium3 Off4 Vibrate

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A319700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualImager Options1 Beeper (default)4 VibrateSilencing the Beeper VolumeTo turn the beeper off, tap Start →Settings →the Personal tab →Sounds and Notifications →the Volume tab, drag the System volumeslider bar to the left “Silent” position, then tap ok to exit this applet.

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualBeeper FrequencySets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not availablewhen you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap t he Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value tochange this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1Options1000-4095 (default is 2090)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A321700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGood Read BeepsSets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when youuse an imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap t he Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1Options0 No beeps1 One beep (default)2 Two beeps

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A322 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualGood Read Beep DurationSets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available whenyou use an imager with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap t he Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration valueto change this parameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1Options0`2550 Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A323700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualImagerTo access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tabto access its parameters.The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed inthe order of their appearance within the Imager tab.Aimer LED durationThe Aimer LED duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned onwhen the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured fordecoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym-bol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not availablewhen you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer.ActionTap t he Aimer LED duration parameter, then enter a value to change thissetting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650,or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments will be rounded down.For example, 2489 ms would be rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 mswould be rounded down to 100 ms, etc..SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1Options0-65500 ms (Default is 0)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A324 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualImage DimensionThe image dimensions control the horizontal size of the image for decod-ing. This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, theremight be more than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note thatthis is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Com-puter.ActionTap t he Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed,then tap an option or enter a value to change this position.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1OptionsLeft position 0 Not supportedRight position 0 Not supportedTop position 0-478 Position in pixels (0)Bottom position 0-479 Position in pixels (479)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A325700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualVirtual WedgeTo access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start →Settings→the System tab →the Data Collection icon to access its control panelapplet.Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tapthis tab to access its parameters.The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that theseare listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab.Virtual WedgeEnables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtualwedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sendsit to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive andinterpret the data as keypad input.Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, thesize of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypadbuffer.ActionTap t he Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this pa-rameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1Options0 Disable1 Enable (default)

Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPreambleSets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 SeriesComputer. Common preambles include a data location number or an op-erator number.ActionTap t he Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1SyntaxADdatawhere data is acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled).Note: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble isdisabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those charactersfrom the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as describedhere, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-figuration command:ADAEAFKCBVEXDFEXAMPLE:To use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as aCode 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AD“BV”

$Control Panel AppletsAppendix —A327700 Series Color Mobile Computer User’s ManualPostambleSets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Se-ries Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such as tabsor carriage return line feeds.ActionTap t he Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change thisparameter setting.SNMP OID1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1SyntaxAEdatawhere data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embeddednull (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is the tab character (\t).Note: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble isdisabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those charactersfrom the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as describedhere, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-figuration command.ADAEAFKCBVEXDFEXAMPLE:To use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (asa Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AE“BV”$